Toshiba 52HMX95 62HMX95 Manual

Thursday, May 4, 2017
Download

OWNER’S MANUAL Integrated High Definition Compatible with Toshiba’s new DLP™ Projection Television TM Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorder! See pages 26 and 55 for details. HIGH-DEFINITION TELEVISION For an overview of steps for setting up your new TV, see page 9. Note: To display a High Definition picture, the TV must be receiving a High Definition signal (such as an over-the-air High Definition TV broadcast, a High Definition digital cable program, or a High Definition digital satellite program). For details, please contact your TV antenna installer, cable provider, or satellite provider. CONSUMER PR CA Note: If the TV is powered off and then quickly on again when the RI OD E TOSHIBA AM UCT lamp unit is hot, it may take several minutes for the picture to appear S, L.L.C. on-screen. This is a property of DLP TV lamp technology and is NOT a sign of malfunction. For details, see “IMPORTANT NOTICE ABOUT HOT LAMP RESTART” on page 5. O IS 45 140 6 01 FILE N o. A 9 Owner’s Record The model number and serial number are on the back of your TV. Record these numbers in the spaces below. 52HMX95 Refer to these numbers whenever you communicate with your Toshiba dealer about this TV. Model number: 62HMX95 Serial number: © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION 23566726A All Rights Reserved

Dear Customer, NOTICE OF POSSIBLE TV STAND INSTABILITY Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba TV. This manual will CAUTION: This television is for use only with help you use the many exciting features of your new TV. the Toshiba stand listed below. Use with other Before operating the TV, please read this manual carts or stands is capable of resulting in instability completely, and keep it nearby for future reference. causing possible injury. Television Stand Model 52HMX95 ST 5275 Safety Precautions 62HMX95 ST 6275 WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. NOTE TO CATV INSTALLERS IN THE U.S.A. WARNING This is a reminder to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK! 820-40 of the U.S. NEC, which provides guidelines for proper grounding DO NOT OPEN. and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, as practical. For additional antenna grounding information, see items 27 DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER- and 28 on page 4. SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. (This does not apply to “Lamp unit replacement and care” on pages 129–131 of this manual.) Child Safety The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an It Makes A Difference equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the Where Your TV Stands product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude Congratulations on your purchase! to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. As you enjoy your new TV, keep these safety tips in mind: The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important The Issue operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.  If you are like most consumers, you have a TV in your home. Many homes, in fact, have more than one TV.  The home theater entertainment experience is a growing trend, and larger Lamp Unit Replacement TVs are popular purchases; however, they are not always supported on the proper TV stands.  Sometimes TVs are improperly secured or inappropriately CAUTION: HOT SURFACE! situated on dressers, bookcases, shelves, desks, audio speakers, The temperature of the lamp chests, or carts. As a result, TVs may fall over, causing immediately after use exceeds unnecessary injury. 392°F (200°C). Touching the Toshiba Cares! lamp before it has cooled will result in severe burns. ALLOW THE LAMP TO COOL FOR AT LEAST ONE (1) HOUR BEFORE  The consumer electronics industry is committed to making home entertainment enjoyable and safe. REPLACING IT.  The Consumer Electronics Association formed the The lamp in this product has a limited service life. The length of Home Entertainment Support Safety Committee, comprised of TV and consumer electronics furniture manufacturers, to service life varies depending on product use and user settings. advocate children’s safety and educate consumers and their If you use the lamp beyond its service life: families about television safety. • you may notice a reduction in the colors and/or brightness of the picture, at which time you should replace the lamp Tune Into Safety unit; and  One size does NOT fit all! Use appropriate furniture large enough to • the strength of the quartz glass in the lamp will be reduced support the weight of your TV (and other electronic components). and the lamp may rupture. If the lamp ruptures, the TV will  Use appropriate angle braces, straps, and anchors to secure your furniture not operate until the lamp unit is replaced. to the wall (but never screw anything directly into the TV). Dispose of the used lamp unit by the approved method for  Carefully read and understand the other enclosed instructions for proper use of this product. your area.  Do not allow children to climb on or play with furniture and TVs. See “Lamp unit replacement and care” on pages 129–131.  Avoid placing any item on top of your TV (such as a VCR, remote control, or toy) that a curious child may reach for. Note: The lamp unit contains mercury.  Remember that children can become excited while watching a program Disposal of mercury may be regulated due to and can potentially push or pull a TV over. environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling  Share our safety message about this hidden hazard of the home with information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic your family and friends. Thank you! Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org). 2500 Wilson Blvd. Arlington, VA 22201 U.S.A. Tel. 703-907-7600 Fax 703-907-7690 www.CE.org CEA is the Sponsor, Producer and Manager of the International CES® 2

Important Safety Instructions 16) WARNING: This product contains a lamp to project the picture, and requires special safety precautions: 1) Read these instructions. • See pages 129–131 for instructions on lamp unit 2) Keep these instructions. replacement and care. 3) Heed all warnings. • DO NOT attempt to service this product except 4) Follow all instructions. as specified on pages 129–131. The only user- serviceable item in this product is the lamp unit. 5) Do not use this apparatus near water. 6) Clean only with a dry cloth. Installation, Care, and Service 7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Installation Follow these recommendations and precautions and heed all 8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including warnings when installing your TV: amplifiers) that produce heat. 17) Never modify this equipment. Changes or modifications 9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or may void: a) the warranty, and b) the user’s authority to grounding type plug. A polarized plug has two blades operate this equipment under the rules of the Federal with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has Communications Commission. two blades and a third grounding Wide blade prong. The wide blade or the third 18) DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL prong are provided for your safety. INJURY, DEATH, OR EQUIPMENT If the provided plug does not fit into DAMAGE! Never place the TV on your outlet, consult an electrician an unstable cart, stand, or table. The TV for replacement of the obsolete outlet. may fall, causing serious personal injury, death, or serious damage to the TV. 10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at 19) Never place or store the TV in direct sunlight; hot, humid plugs, convenience receptacles, and areas; areas subject to excessive dust or vibration; or the point where it exits the apparatus. locations with temperatures at or below 41°F (5°C). 11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the 20) Always place the TV on the applicable optional TV manufacturer. stand(s) listed in the “Specifications” section (if available 12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, for this TV model) or on a sturdy, level, stable surface that bracket, or table specified by the can safely support the size and weight of the unit. See manufacturer, or sold with the “Notice of possible TV stand instability” and “Child Safety” apparatus. When a cart is used, use on page 2. caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 21) Never expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing or place items such as vases, aquariums, any other item filled 13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or with liquid, or candles on top of the TV. when unused for long periods of time. 14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. 22) Always place the back of the television at least one (1) Servicing is required when the apparatus has been inch away from any vertical surface (such as a wall) to damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug allow proper ventilation. is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to 23) Never block or cover the slots or openings in the TV rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been cabinet back, bottom, and sides. Never place the TV: dropped. • on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface; 14a) Item 14 does not apply to “Lamp unit replacement and • too close to drapes, curtains, or walls; or care” on pages 129-131 of this manual. • in a confined space such as a bookcase, built-in cabinet, 14b) CAUTION: If the TV is dropped and the cabinet or or any other place with poor ventilation. enclosure surface has been damaged or the TV does The slots and openings are provided to protect the TV not operate normally, take the following precautions: from overheating and to help maintain reliable operation • ALWAYS turn off the TV and unplug the power cord to of the TV. avoid possible electric shock or fire. • To prevent personal injury, never handle the damaged 24) Never allow anything to rest on or roll over the power television. cord, and never place the TV where the power cord is subject to wear or abuse. • ALWAYS contact a service technician to inspect the TV any time it has been damaged or dropped. 25) Never overload wall outlets and extension cords. 15) CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not use the polarized plug with an extension cord, receptacle, 26) Always operate this equipment from a 120 VAC, 60 Hz or other outlet unless the blades can be inserted completely power source only. to prevent blade exposure. (continued on next page) 3

Installation (continued from previous page) Care (continued from previous column) 27) Always make sure the antenna system is properly 33) For added protection of your TV from lightning and power grounded to provide adequate protection against voltage surges, always unplug the power cord and disconnect the surges and built-up static charges (see Section 810 of the antenna from the TV if you leave the TV unattended or National Electric Code). unused for long periods of time. Antenna lead-in wire 34) During normal use, the TV may make occasional snapping or popping sounds. This is normal, especially when the Antenna discharge unit unit is being turned on or off. If these sounds become (NEC Section 810-20) Ground clamp frequent or continuous, unplug the power cord and contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center. Grounding conductors Electric service equipment (NEC Section 810-21) 35) Special care for DLP™ (Digital Light Processing) units: The lamp unit in this product has a limited service life. The Power service grounding length of service life varies depending on product use or electrode system Ground clamps (NEC Art 250 Part H) user settings. If you use the lamp beyond its service life: • you may notice a reduction in the colors and/or brightness of the picture, at which time you should 28) DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL replace the lamp unit; and INJURY OR DEATH! • the strength of the quartz glass in the lamp will be • Use extreme care to make sure you are never in reduced and the lamp may rupture. If the lamp a position where your body (or any item you are in contact ruptures, the TV will not operate until the lamp unit is with, such as a ladder or screwdriver) can accidentally replaced. touch overhead power lines. Never locate the antenna See “Lamp unit replacement and care” on pages 129–131. near overhead power lines or other electrical circuits. • Never attempt to install any of the following during • Dispose of the used lamp unit by the approved method for your area. lightning activity: a) an antenna system; or b) cables, wires, or any home theater component connected to an • The lamp unit contains mercury. Disposal of antenna or phone system. mercury may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org). Care For better performance and safer operation of your TOSHIBA Service TV, follow these recommendations and precautions: 36) WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK! Never attempt to service the TV yourself, 29) Always sit approximately 10–25 feet away from the TV and except as specified on pages 129–131. as directly in front of it as possible. The picture can appear Opening and removing the covers may expose you to dull if you sit too far to the left or right of the TV, or if dangerous voltage or other hazards. Failure to follow this sunlight or room lights reflect on the screen. Turn the TV WARNING may result in death or serious injury. Refer all off to check for reflections on the screen, and then remove servicing not specified in this manual to a Toshiba Authorized the source of reflections while viewing the TV. Service Center. 37) If you have the TV serviced: 30) Always unplug the TV before cleaning. Never use liquid or • Ask the service technician to use only replacement parts aerosol cleaners. Clean only with a soft, dry cloth. specified by the manufacturer. Do not spray volatile compounds, such as insecticide, on the cabinet. This may discolor or damage the cabinet. • Upon completion of service, ask the service technician to perform routine safety checks to determine that the TV is in safe operating condition. 31) WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK! Never spill liquids or push objects of any 38) When the TV reaches the end of its useful life, ask a kind into the TV cabinet slots. qualified service technician to properly dispose of the TV. Note: The lamp unit contains mercury. Disposal of mercury may be regulated due to environmental considerations. Dispose of 32) If the air temperature rises suddenly (for example, when the used lamp unit by the approved method for your area. the TV is first delivered), condensation may form on the For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local lenses. This can make the picture appear distorted or the authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org). color appear faded. If this happens, turn off the TV for 6 to 7 hours to allow the condensation to evaporate. Digital Light Processing, DLP and the DLP medallion are trademarks of Texas Instruments. 4

FCC Declaration of Conformity Compliance Statement (Part 15): The Toshiba 52HMX95 and 62HMX95 DLP™ projection interference to radio communications. However, there is no TVs comply with Part 15 of the FCC rules. guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this interference to radio or television reception, which can be device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this determined by removing and applying power to the device must accept any interference that may cause equipment, the user is encouraged to try to correct the undesired operation. interference by one or more of the following measures: The party responsible for compliance to these rules is: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. • Increase the separation between the equipment and the 82 Totowa Rd. Wayne, NJ 07470. receiver. Ph: (973) 628-8000 • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply from that to which the receiver is connected. with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide for help. reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this equipment not can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and expressly approved by Toshiba could void the user’s authority used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful to operate this equipment. Important notes about your DLPTM projection TV 1) The light source for this TV is a projection lamp unit with a 6) Depending on the media you are viewing, it is possible, although limited service life. When the lamp wears out, the picture may unlikely, that a limited number of viewers may see a “rainbow become dark or black or the lamp may fail, at which time you effect” on the screen, which can, in rare instances, result in eye must replace the lamp unit. See “Lamp unit replacement and fatigue. This is a rare occurrence related to DLP technology and care” on pages 129–131. is not a sign of TV malfunction. 7) The TV contains several cooling fans to moderate the 2) When the lamp mode is set to Low Power, every time the TV is internal temperature. You may be able to hear the fans powered on, the lamp will initially be in High Bright mode but for several minutes after the TV is powered off. This is will switch to Low Power mode in approximately 1 minute. You a normal function of the Quick Restart™ feature and is not a sign will notice a change in screen brightness when this happens. of TV malfunction. You can set the Quick Restart™ feature to This is normal and is not a sign of malfunction. (See page 80 stop the fans as soon as the TV is powered off. See “Setting the for details.) Quick Restart™ feature” on page 56. 3) Every time the TV is powered on, it may take several minutes for 8) The green and red LED lights on the TV’s front control touchpad indicate the TV’s current status. If either light flashes, see “LED the picture to obtain full brightness. indications” on page 125 for details. 4) The TV’s display is manufactured using an extremely high level 9) Every time the TV power cord is plugged in, either the message of precision technology; however, an occasional pixel (dot of “Now Booting . . .” will display on-screen until the picture light) may show constantly on the screen. This is a structural appears, or the green LED will blink until the TV enters standby property of DLP™ (Digital Light Processing™) technology and is mode (plugged in but not powered on). This is normal and is not not a sign of malfunction. Such pixels are not visible when the a sign of malfunction. picture is viewed from a normal viewing distance (see item 5, 10) When connecting an external A/V device, if you connect the below). device’s video output to the TV and the device’s audio output to a separate audio system, the picture and sound may not 5) Always sit approximately 10–25 feet away from the TV and as synchronize completely. directly in front of it as possible. The picture quality may be 11) When playing a video game on the TV, there may be a slight affected by your viewing position and length of viewing time. delay between your command (e.g., joystick, keyboard) and the If you sit too closely to the TV for too long, you may suffer from picture movement on the screen. eye fatigue. See item 29 on page 4. IMPORTANT NOTICE ABOUT “HOT LAMP RESTART” When the TV has been powered on long enough for the lamp unit to get hot, it may take several minutes for the picture to appear on-screen in the following situations: • when the Quick Restart™ feature is set to OFF and you turn the TV off and then on again within a few minutes; or • if the TV is on when a short-term power failure, power surge, or other similar power failure occurs, such that the TV loses and regains power within a few minutes. This is a property of DLP TV lamp technology and is NOT a sign of malfunction. If this occurs, the green LED on the TV front panel will blink (and the red LED will be lit solid) until the TV is finished restarting the lamp and the normal picture appears. If both LEDs are blinking, you will need to turn the TV off and then on again to restart the lamp. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 5

Contents Important safety, care, and service information ........... 2–4 Chapter 4: Menu layout and navigation ........................... 40 FCC Declaration of Conformity Compliance Main menu layout .............................................................. 40 Statement (Part 15): ............................................................ 5 Setup/Installation menu layout ........................................... 41 Navigating the menu system ............................................... 41 Important notes about your DLP™ projection TV ............... 5 Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen® setup ............................ 42 Chapter 1: Introduction .......................................................... 8 Setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system ..................... 42 Welcome to Toshiba ........................................................... 8 TV Guide On Screen® Reminder ....................................... 45 Features of your new TV .................................................... 8 Turning off the TV Guide On Screen® Overview of steps for installing, setting up, and automatic display feature ................................................ 45 using your new TV .......................................................... 9 Chapter 6: Setting up your TV ............................................. 46 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV ......................................... 10 Selecting the menu language ............................................... 46 TV front panel touchpad and side panel controls Configuring the antenna input sources for the ANT 1 and connections ........................................................... 10 and ANT 2 terminals ..................................................... 46 TV back panel connections ................................................ 11 Programming channels into the TV’s channel memory ....... 47 Overview of cable types ...................................................... 13 Programming channels automatically .......................... 47 About the connection illustrations ...................................... 14 Manually adding and deleting channels in the Connecting a digital CableCARD™ .................................... 14 channel memory ..................................................... 48 Connecting a VCR and antenna or Cable TV Programming your favorite channels .................................. 49 (no Cable box) ............................................................... 15 Setting up and using TheaterNet™ on-screen Connecting a camcorder ..................................................... 15 device control ................................................................. 50 Connecting a VCR and Cable box ..................................... 16 Setting up TheaterNet ................................................. 50 Connecting a VCR and satellite receiver ............................. 17 Using the TheaterNet control icons ............................. 51 Connecting a DVD player with S-video, a VCR, TheaterNet IR device codes ........................................ 52 and a Cable box .............................................................. 18 Setting the AVHD device skip time .................................... 55 Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream® Setting the HDMI™ audio mode ........................................ 55 (component video) and a VCR ....................................... 19 Setting the time and date .................................................... 55 Connecting two VCRs ....................................................... 20 Viewing the CableCARD™ menu ...................................... 56 Connecting an HDMI™ or DVI device to the Setting the Quick Restart™ feature ..................................... 56 HDMI input .................................................................. 21 Viewing the digital signal meter ......................................... 57 Connecting a device to the TheaterNet OUT infrared Viewing the system status ................................................... 57 terminal using the IR blaster cable for IR pass-through device control ................................................................. 22 Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® Connecting an IR receiver/repeater or home theater interactive program guide ............................................... 58 control system to the TheaterNet IN infrared terminal ... 23 Setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system ..................... 58 Connecting a digital audio system ...................................... 24 Navigating the TV Guide On Screen® system ..................... 59 Connecting an analog audio system .................................... 24 TV Guide On Screen® remote control functions ......... 59 Connecting IEEE1394 video devices .................................. 25 Video Window ........................................................... 60 Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices ................... 25 Panel Menus ............................................................... 60 Supported signals ........................................................... 25 Info Box ...................................................................... 61 Using TheaterNet™ on-screen device control .................. 25 TV Guide On Screen® Icons ....................................... 61 Connecting an AVHD TV Guide On Screen® Services .......................................... 62 (external hard drive) or D-VHS recorder .................... 26 LISTINGS screen ....................................................... 62 IEEE1394 device initialization ....................................... 26 SEARCH screen .......................................................... 63 IEEE1394 device management ....................................... 27 RECORDINGS screen ............................................... 65 G-LINK® connection ......................................................... 28 SCHEDULE screen .................................................... 66 Connecting a personal computer (PC) ............................... 29 Recording features ....................................................... 66 Connecting a home network .............................................. 30 Reminder features ....................................................... 68 SETUP screen ............................................................. 70 Chapter 3: Using the remote control ................................. 31 Change system settings .......................................... 70 Learning about the remote control ..................................... 31 Change channel display ......................................... 70 Installing the remote control batteries ................................. 33 Change default options .......................................... 71 Using the remote control MODE button to control your other devices ........................................................... 33 Remote Control functional key chart ................................. 34 Programming the remote control to operate your other devices ........................................................... 36 Multi-brand remote control device codes ............................ 38 Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 6

Contents Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features ..................................... 72 Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu ....................................... 97 Selecting the video input source to view ............................. 72 Entering the PIN code ....................................................... 97 Labeling the video input sources ......................................... 73 If you cannot remember your PIN code ............................. 97 Tuning channels ................................................................. 74 Changing your PIN code ................................................... 97 Using the Channel Browser ™ ...................................... 74 Blocking TV programs and movies by rating (V-Chip) ......... 98 Tuning your favorite channels ..................................... 76 Blocking channels ............................................................... 99 Tuning to the next programmed channel .................... 76 Unlocking programs temporarily ........................................ 99 Tuning to a specific channel (programmed or Using the input lock feature ............................................... 99 unprogrammed) ...................................................... 76 Using the GameTimer™ ................................................... 100 Switching between two channels using Using the front panel lock feature ..................................... 100 Channel Return ...................................................... 76 Chapter 10: Using the Picture Viewer and Switching between two channels using Audio Player .......................................................................... 101 SurfLock™ ............................................................... 76 Media specifications ......................................................... 101 Selecting the picture size ..................................................... 77 File/folder name specifications .................................. 101 Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture Picture Viewer/JPEG file specifications ..................... 101 (TheaterWide 2 and 3 only) ........................................... 79 Audio Player/MP3 file specifications ......................... 102 Using the auto aspect ratio feature ...................................... 79 Networked PC specifications .................................... 102 Selecting the cinema mode (480i signals only) .................... 80 Memory card specifications ....................................... 102 Using the Picture Viewer .................................................. 103 Selecting the lamp mode .................................................... 80 Accessing JPEG files stored on a networked PC ........ 103 Using the POP features ...................................................... 81 Accessing JPEG files stored on a memory card .......... 103 Using the POP double-window feature ....................... 81 Viewing JPEG files on the TV .................................. 104 Switching the speaker audio (main or POP) ................ 82 Using the Audio Player ..................................................... 105 POP double-window aspect ratio ................................ 82 Accessing MP3 files stored on a networked PC ......... 105 Using the FREEZE feature ................................................. 83 Accessing MP3 files stored on a memory card ........... 105 Using the favorite channel scan feature ............................... 83 Playing MP3 audio files on the TV ........................... 106 Adjusting the picture .......................................................... 84 Memory card care and handling ....................................... 106 Selecting the picture mode .......................................... 84 Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature .... 107 Adjusting the picture quality ....................................... 84 A. Connect the TV to your home network ....................... 107 Using the Color Management feature ......................... 85 B. Set up the network address ........................................... 107 Using CableClear®/DNR (digital noise reduction) ...... 86 Automatically setting up the network address ............ 107 Selecting the color temperature ................................... 86 Manually setting up the network address .................. 108 Using MPEG noise reduction ..................................... 87 Resetting the network address ................................... 109 Using dynamic contrast ............................................... 87 C. Set up file sharing on your PC ..................................... 110 Using the closed caption mode ........................................... 88 Compatible operating systems ................................... 110 Advanced closed captions ............................................ 88 Setting up file sharing on a PC with Microsoft® Digital closed captions ................................................ 89 Windows® XP Service Pack 1 or Service Pack 2 ..... 110 Adjusting the audio ............................................................ 90 Setting up file sharing on a PC with Microsoft® Muting the sound ....................................................... 90 Windows® 2000 .................................................... 111 Using the digital audio selector ................................... 90 D. Set up file sharing on the TV ....................................... 112 Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts ................................... 90 E. Viewing/playing shared files on the TV ........................ 112 Adjusting the audio quality ......................................... 91 F. Set up e-mail scheduling ............................................... 113 Using the sub-bass system (SBS) ................................. 91 Required information and services ............................ 113 Using the StableSound® feature ................................... 91 Setting up e-mail scheduling ..................................... 113 Using the SRS WOW™ surround sound feature .......... 92 Description of fields in the “E-mail Scheduling Using the virtual surround sound feature (Dolby Setup” window .............................................. 115–116 Virtual/TruSurround) ............................................. 92 G. Using e-mail scheduling .............................................. 117 Turning off the built-in speakers ................................. 93 E-mail parameters ..................................................... 117 Selecting the optical audio output format ................... 93 Sending a request e-mail to the TV ........................... 117 Setting the On/Off Timer .................................................. 94 Formatting a request e-mail ....................................... 117 Setting the sleep timer ........................................................ 94 Receiving an e-mail from the TV .............................. 119 Using the PC settings feature .............................................. 95 Modifying an existing recording or reminder ............ 119 Displaying TV setting information on-screen Chapter 12: Troubleshooting ............................................. 120 using RECALL ............................................................... 96 General troubleshooting ........................................... 120–124 Understanding the auto power off feature ........................... 96 LED indications ............................................................... 125 Understanding the last mode memory feature .................... 96 TV Guide On Screen® FAQ ..................................... 126–128 Using the Gray Level feature .............................................. 96 Chapter 13: Appendix ......................................................... 129 Lamp unit replacement ............................................ 129–131 Specifications ................................................................... 132 Limited United States Warranty ....................................... 133 Index ....................................................................................... 135 Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 7

1 Introduction Welcome to Toshiba Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba TV, one of the most innovative DLP™ projection See “Important notes about your TVs on the market. The goal of this manual is to guide you through setting up and DLP™ projection TV” on page 5. operating your TV as quickly as possible. • This manual applies to models 52HMX95 and 62HMX95. Before you start reading, check the model number on the back of your TV. • Instructions in this manual are based on using the remote control. You also can use the controls on the TV front touchpad if they have the same name as those referred to on the remote control. (MENU on the front touchpad functions as ENTER when a menu is on-screen or when the TV Guide On Screen® system is open.) • The side panel and back panel provide terminals for connecting other equipment to your TV. See page 10 for front touchpad and side panel details. See page 11 for back panel details. See pages 14–30 for instructions on connecting other devices to your TV. • Please read all safety and operating instructions in this manual carefully and keep this manual for future reference. Features of your new TV The following are just a few of the many exciting features of your new Toshiba widescreen, integrated HD, DLP™ projection TV: • Integrated digital tuning (8VSB ATSC and QAM) eliminates the need for a separate digital converter set-top box (in most cases). • TV Guide On Screen® no-fee interactive program guide (Chapters 5 and 7). • Digital CableCARD™ slot for viewing encrypted digital Cable TV programs (page 14). • Digital recording by connecting a Toshiba Symbio™ Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorder or a D-VHS digital recording device to one of the IEEE1394 jacks. You can record high definition and standard definition material from either tuner (page 26). • Memory card slots [SD Memory Card, MultiMediaCard, Memory Stick, CompactFlash, xD-Picture Card™] for viewing JPEG picture files as a “slide show” (page 103) and playing MP3 audio files (page 104). • TheaterNet™ icons for on-screen control of external IR and IEEE1394 devices (page 50). • Two IEEE1394 ports for multi-device connection and control (page 25). Note: After you set up the TV Guide On Screen® system (Chapter 5), • Two HDMI (DVI) digital, high-definition multimedia interfaces (page 21). the program guide opens • Two sets of ColorStream® HD high-resolution component video inputs (pages 17 and 19). automatically by default when • Dolby Digital (page 24), SRS WOW™ (page 92), and Dolby Virtual TruSurround (page 92), you turn on the TV. You can turn off audio technologies. the automatic program guide (page 45) and instead press the TV GUIDE • Digital Audio Out optical audio connection (page 24). button on the remote control to • CableClear® DNR digital picture noise reduction (page 86). manually open the program guide. • Double-window POP (page 81) and multi-window Favorites (page 83) features. • PC IN (Analog RGB) terminal for using the TV screen as the display for a PC (pages 11 and 29). • RJ-45 (Ethernet) port for connecting to a home network to allow file sharing (JPEG picture files and MP3 audio fiiles) and e-mail scheduling of recordings and reminders (page 30). ______________ In the United States, TV Guide and other related marks are registered marks of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. The TV Guide On Screen system is manufactured under license from Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. The TV Guide On Screen system is protected by one or more of the following issued United States patents 6,498,895; 6,418,556; 6,331,877; 6,239,794; 6,154,203; 5,940,073; 4,908,713; 4,751,578; 4,706,121. GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OR AVAILABILITY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION OR OTHER DATA IN THE TV GUIDE ON SCREEN® SYSTEM AND CANNOT GUARANTEE SERVICE AVAILABILITY IN YOUR AREA. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE ACCURACY OR AVAILABILITY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION OR OTHER DATA IN THE TV GUIDE ON SCREEN® SYSTEM. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited pay-per-view uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 8

Chapter 1: Introduction Overview of steps for installing, setting up, and using your new TV Follow these steps to set up your TV and begin using its many exciting features. 1. Carefully read the important safety, installation, care, 9. Program the remote control to operate your other and service information on pages 2–5. Keep this device(s) (pages 33–39). manual for future reference. 10. AFTER connecting all cables and devices, plug in the 2. Observe the following when choosing a location for power cords for your TV and other devices. the TV: • Read “Installation” on pages 3–4. 11. After you plug in the TV power cord, the green LED (on the TV front touchpad, to the left of the POWER button) will • Read “Important notes about your DLP™ projection TV” on blink while the TV is booting until the remote control is usable. page 5. When the green LED stops blinking, press POWER to turn on • Place the TV on the applicable optional TV stand listed in the the TV. “Specifications” section (if available for this TV model) or on a sturdy, level, stable surface that can safely support the size See “LED indications” on page 125. and weight of the unit. 12. See “Menu layout and navigation” for a quick overview of navigating the TV’s menu system (pages 40–41). NOTICE OF POSSIBLE TV STAND INSTABILITY DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY 13. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide OR DEATH! Use this TV only with the TOSHIBA TV On Screen® system (if available in your area). stand listed in the “Specifications” section of this manual. Use with other stands may result in instability, causing possible injury or death. 14. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide On Screen® program guide (if available in your area). • Place the TV in a location where light does not reflect on the 15. Program channels into the TV’s channel memory screen. (page 47). • Place the TV far enough from walls and other objects to allow proper ventilation. Inadequate ventilation may cause 16. Set up the TheaterNet™ on-screen device control overheating, which will damage the TV. THIS TYPE OF feature (if applicable to your particular home theater system DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED UNDER THE TOSHIBA components) (page 50). WARRANTY. 17. For details on using the TV’s features, see Chapters 8 3. Do not plug in any power cords until AFTER you have and 9. connected all cables and devices to your TV. 18. For details on using the JPEG Picture Viewer and MP3 4. BEFORE connecting cables or devices to the TV, learn Audio Player to view/play files saved on either a memory card the functions of the TV’s connections and controls (pages 10- or networked PC, see Chapter 10. 12). 19. For details on connecting the TV to a home network 5. Connect your other electronic device(s) to the TV to allow file sharing and e-mail scheduling of recordings and (pages 14–30). reminders, see Chapter 11. 6. Connect the G-LINK® cable (either one of the enclosed IR blaster cables) from your VCR and/or Cable box (if applicable) to 20. For help, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide (Chapter 12). the G-LINK® terminal so you can use the TV Guide On Screen® 21. For lamp unit replacement instructions, see Chapter 13. features (applies to VCRs and cable boxes only). See page 28. 7. Install the batteries in the remote control (page 33). 22. For technical specifications and warranty information, see Chapter 13. 8. See “Learning about the remote control” (page 31) for an overview of the buttons on the remote control. 23. Enjoy your new TV! Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 9

2 Connecting your TV TV front panel touchpad and side panel controls and connections Front of TV Side panel TV/VIDEO EXIT CHANNEL VOLUME MENU POWER Remote sensor 1 Front panel touchpad* EXIT zyx • MENU (ENTER)** 3a 4 5 GUIDE POWER 2 6 Right side of TV { { VIDEO-3 IN Memory card 0 slots !¡ TV/VIDEO Channel zy Volume x • Green/Red LEDs 3b 7 8 9 *Gently touch the printed keys on the touchpad. **The MENU button on the TV front panel touchpad functions as the ENTER button when a menu is on-screen. 1 Remote sensor (behind the screen) — Point the remote 7 CHANNEL yz — When no menu is on-screen, these control toward this area of the TV screen. See “Remote buttons change the channel (programmed channels only; see control effective range” on page 32. page 47). When a menu is on-screen, these buttons function 2 GUIDE — Press to access the TV Guide On Screen® as up/down menu navigation buttons. interactive program guide. (See Chapters 5 and 7.) 8 VOLUME x • — When no menu is on-screen, these 3a EXIT — When a menu is on-screen, this button functions buttons adjust the volume level. When a menu is on-screen, as the EXIT button. Press to instantly close an on-screen these buttons function as left/right menu navigation menu. buttons. 3b TV/VIDEO — When no menu is on-screen, this button 9 Green and Red LEDs functions as the TV/VIDEO button (page 72). Repeatedly When the red LED lights solid (not blinking), it indicates press to change the input source you are viewing (ANT 1, that the TV power cord is plugged in. ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, HDMI 1, HDMI 2, ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2, PC). When the green LED lights solid (not blinking), it indicates that recording is in progress. 4 ARROWS yzx • — When a menu is on-screen, these buttons function as up/down/left/right menu navigation See “LED indications” on page 125 for additional buttons. information. 5 MENU (ENTER) — Press to access the menu system (see 0 VIDEO-3 — The side panel A/V connections are referred to pages 40–41). When a menu is on-screen or the TV Guide as “VIDEO 3” and include standard A/V connections plus On Screen® program guide is open, the MENU button on optional S-video. (The VIDEO 1 and VIDEO 2 A/V the front touchpad functions as the ENTER button. connections are on the TV’s back panel; see page 11.) 6 POWER — Press to turn the TV on and off. !¡ Memory card slots — Insert a memory card into one of If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote the memory card slots to view JPEG files (such as photos) as control or TV front panel and you cannot turn off the TV, a “slide show” on your TV or listen to MP3 audio files (see press and hold the POWER button on the TV front panel Chapter 10). for 5 or more seconds to reset the TV. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 10

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV TV back panel connections For an explanation of cable types, see page 13. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 } } 9 0 1 VIDEO 1 IN and VIDEO 2 IN — Two sets of standard 6 PC IN/AUDIO — For connecting audio from a personal (composite) video and standard audio inputs plus optional computer when using the TV screen as the display for the S-video inputs for connecting devices with composite video connected PC. See page 29. or S-video output. Note: Standard (composite) video and S-video cables carry 7 PC IN/VIDEO— For connecting video from a personal only video information; separate audio cables are required for a computer when using the TV screen as the display for the complete connection. connected PC. See page 29. 2 ColorStream® HD-1 and ColorStream® HD-2 — Two sets 8 TheaterNet™ (IR) OUT 1 and OUT 2 — For controlling of ColorStream® high-definition component video inputs infrared remote-controlled devices through the TV. You can (with standard stereo audio inputs) for connecting devices connect up to two devices with either one of the enclosed with component video output, such as a Toshiba DVD IR blaster cables, and then control the devices using the player with ColorStream®. See pages 17 and 19. TV’s IR pass-through or TheaterNet™ on-screen device control features. See pages 22 and 50. Note: Component video cables carry only video information; separate audio cables are required for a complete connection. TheaterNet™ (IR) IN — For connecting an infrared remote-controlled receiver/repeater or home theater control 3 Variable Audio OUT — Standard analog audio outputs for system. See page 23. connecting an analog amplifier with external speakers. See page 24. 9 Digital Audio OUT — Optical audio output in Dolby Digital or PCM (pulse-code modulation) format for 4 A/V OUT — Standard composite video and analog audio connecting an external Dolby Digital decoder, amplifier, outputs for connecting a VCR for editing and dubbing. See A/V receiver, or home theater system with optical audio page 20 for details. input. See page 24. 5 HDMI Audio IN 1 and 2 — Two sets of analog audio IN 0 CableCARD™ slot — For use with a digital security card terminals for use when connecting a DVI device with analog and digital cable TV service (provided by your local cable audio output to one of the HDMI inputs. See page 21. Also operator) to view encrypted digital programming. See pages see item 2 on the next page. 14 and 56. (Continued on next page) ___________ HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 11

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV TV back panel connections (continued) { 1 2 3 4 5 1 ANT-1 (cable) IN and ANT-2 IN — Two RF inputs that 4 TheaterNet IEEE1394 1 and 2 — Two bi-directional support analog (NTSC) and digital (ATSC) off-air antenna digital IEEE1394 ports for connecting multiple devices signals and analog and digital Cable TV (QAM) signals. with compressed digital video. Because these ports are Note: If you have an antenna only, connect it to ANT-1. If you have bi-directional, they can be used for playback and recording. both cable TV and an antenna, connect the cable TV to ANT-1 and You can control your IEEE1394 devices using the TV’s the antenna to ANT-2. TheaterNet on-screen device control icons. See pages 25–27 and 50. 2 HDMI™ IN 1 and 2 — Two High-Definition Multimedia Note: IEEE1394 cable carries both audio and video information; Interface inputs receive digital audio and uncompressed therefore, separate audio cables are not required. digital video from an HDMI device or uncompressed digital video from a DVI device. See page 21. Also see item 5 on 5 RJ-45 (Ethernet)* — For connecting the TV to a home the previous page. network. See page 30. 3 G-LINK® — For use with one of the enclosed IR blaster/ G-LINK® cables to enable the TV Guide On Screen® *THINC™ system recording features. See page 28. (Toshiba Home Interactive Network Connection) The RJ-45 (Ethernet) port allows your Toshiba Cinema Series TV to connect to your home network. This revolutionary home entertainment networking system lets you access MP3 audio files and JPEG picture files stored on a networked PC (as shared files) and play/display them on your TV. You also can play your shared MP3 audio files through a connected audio system. See pages 24 and 30 and Chapters 10 and 11 for details. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 12

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV Overview of cable types Note: Two dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK® cables are included with your TV. All other required cables, if not provided with your other devices, can be purchased at many electronics accessory suppliers. Coaxial (F-type) cable ● Coaxial (F-type) cable is used for connecting your antenna, cable TV service, and/or cable converter box to the ANT-1 and/or ANT-2 RF inputs on your TV. ● Standard A/V cables (composite video) usually come in sets of three, and are for use with video devices with analog audio and composite video output. These cables (and Standard A/V cables (red/white/yellow) the related inputs on your TV) are typically color-coded according to use: yellow for video, red for stereo right audio, and white for stereo left (or mono) audio. S-video cable ● S-video cable is for use with video devices with S-video output. Separate audio cables are required for a complete connection. Note: An S-video cable provides better picture performance than a composite video cable. If you connect an S-video cable, be sure to disconnect the standard (composite) video cable or the picture performance will be unacceptable. Component video cables (red/green/blue) ● Component video cables come in sets of three and are for use with video devices with component video output. (ColorStream ® is Toshiba’s brand of component video.) These cables are typically color-coded red, green, and blue. Separate audio cables are required for a complete connection. HDMI cable Note: Component video cables provide better picture performance than a standard (composite) video or S-video cable. ● HDMI cable is for use with devices with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) output. HDMI cable delivers digital audio and video in its native format. IEEE1394 cable (4-pin) This cable carries both video and audio information; therefore, separate audio cables are not required for a complete HDMI device connection. See page 21 for further details. Note: HDMI cable provides better picture performance than a standard (composite) video or S-video cable. ● IEEE1394 cable is for use with video devices with compressed digital video output Dual-wand IR blaster/ G-LINK® cable that meet CEA specifications for IEEE1394. This cable carries both video and audio (2 included) information; therefore, no separate audio cables are required for a complete connection. See pages 25–27. Note: Optical audio cable • The transmission capability of any IEEE1394 cable used with this TV must be S400 (400 Mbps maximum). • IEEE1394 cable provides better picture performance than a standard (composite) video or S-video cable. ● Dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK® cable is for use with video devices with IR (infrared) Ethernet (RJ-45) cable remote control. Two of these cables are included with your TV. One is for connection to the G-LINK® terminal (page 28) to enable TV Guide On Screen ® recording features (Chapters 5 and 7). The other can be used with the TV’s IR pass-through feature (page Note: Although your TV includes both HDMI 22) and TheaterNet™ on-screen device control feature (page 50). and IEEE1394 connections, it may not Note: The two IR blaster/G-LINK ® cables included with your TV have specific characteristics that operate with another device you have that allow them to work properly with this TV’s IR OUT and G-LINK ® terminals. Never use other includes such a connection. For example, the aftermarket IR blaster or G-LINK ® cables with this TV. Other cables may not function properly and can cause damage. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY YOUR IEEE1394 ports are not intended to operate TOSHIBA WARRANTY. with current model Mini DV camcorders, and the HDMI input is not intended for ● Optical audio cable is for connecting receivers with Dolby Digital or PCM connection to a computer. Copyright (pulse-code modulation) optical audio input to the TV’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT protection requirements may also prohibit or terminal. See page 24. limit connectivity. See page 21 for details ● Ethernet (RJ-45) cable is used to connect the TV to your home network. See page 30 about the HDMI input. See pages 25–27 for and Chapter 11. details about the IEEE1394 ports. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 13

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV About the connection illustrations You can connect different types and brands of devices to your TV in several different configurations. The connection illustrations in this manual are representative of typical device connections only. The input/output terminals on your devices may differ from those illustrated herein. For details on connecting and using your specific devices, refer to each device’s owner’s manual. Connecting a digital CableCARD™ This digital television is capable of receiving analog basic, digital  To view encrypted digital channels: basic, and digital premium cable television programming by direct connection to a cable system providing such 1. Connect your digital Cable TV cable to ANT-1. programming. 2. With the front of the CableCARD™ facing up, insert it into A security card (such as a digital CableCARD™), provided by the CableCARD™ slot on the back of the TV (see your cable operator, is required to view encrypted digital illustration below left). programming. 3. After the CableCARD™ is inserted, a CableCARD™ option Certain advanced and interactive digital cable services (such as appears in the Applications menu, with informational video-on-demand, a cable operator’s enhanced program guide, screens provided by your digital CableCARD™ service. See and data-enhanced television services) will not work with the page 56 for additional information. use of a CableCARD™ and may require the use of a separate set-top box from your cable operator. CableCard Connected -- Acquiring channel information. For more information, contact your local cable operator. CableCard services will only operate Applications TV Guide On Screen IP Service You will need: with cable signal connected to Antenna 1. Audio Player Conditional Access Picture Viewer CableCARD(tm) Status  one digital CableCARD™ (contact your cable operator) Digital CC/Audio Selector CableCARD Network Setup CableCARD(tm) Pairing  digital cable subscription service (contact your cable operator) Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit TV back panel Note: • Connect the cable from your digital cable TV service directly to ANT 1 only. If you connect the digital cable through a VCR first and/or to ANT 2, the TV may not receive the signals correctly. • Always use the EJECT button to remove the CableCARD™. Removing the CableCARD™ without pressing EJECT can damage the CableCARD and/or TV. Such damage is NOT covered under your Toshiba warranty. • Never insert any object or card other than a CableCARD™ (including, without limitation, a PCMCIA card) into the CableCARD™ slot. • Always make sure the CableCARD™ is facing the correct direction. • When using a CableCARD™, you do not need to program channels into the TV memory. The CableCARD™ automatically loads the cable channel list into the TV’s channel memory (page 47). • The CableCARD™ may take up to 5 minutes to “pair” with the TV From digital Cable service and download channel information. CableCARD™ information and Note: Connect the digital cable directly to ANT 1 only. channels will not be available until this process is completed. If you connect the cable through a VCR first and/or to CableCARD™ technology, like all new and emerging technology, may ANT 2, the TV may not receive the signals correctly. from time to time experience compatibility issues due to the different ways in which television manufacturers and cable system operators implement the CableCARD™ specifications. Most issues can be easily resolved. If you experience any performance-related CableCARD™ issues with your Toshiba television, please contact Toshiba ________ Consumer Solutions by calling (800) 631-3811 or by visiting CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc. http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 14

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV Connecting a VCR and antenna or Cable TV (no Cable box) You will need:  one signal splitter From Cable TV or antenna  three coaxial cables Signal splitter IN  two sets of standard A/V cables OUT OUT • For better picture performance, if your VCR has S-video, use an S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard Stereo VCR video cable. Do not connect both types of video cables to VIDEO AUDIO IN from ANT L R VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the picture CH 3 IN performance will be unacceptable. OUT to TV CH 4 OUT • If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV to your L R VCR’s audio OUT terminal using the white audio cable only. TV  To view the antenna or Cable signal: Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.*  To view the VCR: Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source on the TV.*  To use the TV Guide On Screen ® recording features: ® 1. Connect the G-LINK cable according to the instructions on page 28. 2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT terminals on the TV (see illustration). 3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the VCR. ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the 4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide applicable input mode is selected. On Screen® system. The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television 5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the On Screen® system. Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. Connecting a camcorder You will need:  one set of standard A/V cables Camcorder • For better picture performance, if your camcorder has S-video, use an S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard video cable. Do not connect both an S-video cable and a standard video cable to VIDEO 3 at the same time or the picture performance will be unacceptable. VIDEO AUDIO L OUT  To view the camcorder video: R Select the VIDEO 3 video input source on the TV.* ______________ * To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control (see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3. VIDEO 3 inputs on TV right side panel Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 15

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV Connecting a VCR and Cable box You will need: From Cable TV  one signal splitter IN  five coaxial cables Cable box Signal splitter CH 3 IN OUT  two sets of standard A/V cables OUT CH 4 OUT • For better picture performance from your VCR: If your VCR has Stereo VCR S-video, connect an S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead VIDEO AUDIO IN from ANT L R of the standard video cable. Do not connect an S-video cable and CH 3 IN CH 4 a standard video cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time OUT to TV OUT or the picture performance will be unacceptable. L R • If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV to your TV VCR’s audio out terminal using the white audio cable only. • When you use a Cable box, you may not be able to use the remote control to program or access certain features on the TV.  To view basic Cable channels and use the TV’s features: Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.* Use the TV controls (front panel or remote control) to change channels and access the TV’s features.  To view basic and premium Cable channels: Turn OFF the VCR. Select the ANT 2 video input source on the TV.* Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever channel the Cable box output is set to). Use the Cable box controls to change channels.  To view the VCR: Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source on the TV.* Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the Note: A VIDEO 1 connection with an S-Video cable (instead ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the of a standard video cable) will provide better picture appropriate input mode is selected.* performance (as mentioned in the first bulleted item at the top of this page). _____________  To enable the TV Guide On Screen system to work ® * To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control with your cable box and to use the TV Guide (see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other On Screen® recording features: devices, see Chapter 3. 1. Connect the G-LINK® cable according to the instructions on page 28. The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television 2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the terminals on the TV (see illustration). Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject 3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your you to civil and criminal liability. VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the VCR. 4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system. 5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide On Screen® system. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 16

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV Connecting a VCR and satellite receiver You will need: From antenna  one signal splitter IN Signal splitter  four coaxial cables OUT  one set of component video cables (if your OUT satellite receiver does not have component Stereo VCR video, connect the standard A/V cables only) VIDEO AUDIO  one pair of standard audio cables IN from ANT L R CH 3 IN CH 4  three sets of standard A/V cables OUT to TV OUT L R • For better picture performance, if your satellite receiver and VCR have S-video, connect S-video TV cables (plus audio cables) instead of the standard video cables. Do not connect both types of video cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the picture performance will be unacceptable. • If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV (VIDEO 1) to your VCR’s AUDIO OUT terminal using the white audio cable only.  To view satellite programs using the component video connections: Select the ColorStream HD-1 video input source on the TV.*  To view satellite programs using the standard From satellite dish Satellite receiver video connections or to record satellite programs: AUDIO Turn on all three devices. Set the VCR to the appropriate Y PB PR LOUT L line input (refer to your VCR owner’s manual for details). Satellite IN R R Select the VIDEO 2 video input source on the TV.* S-VIDEO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO OUT  To view the VCR or view and record antenna channels: Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1, Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to the channel you want ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate to watch. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source on the input mode is selected.* TV.* _____________ * To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control  To use the TV Guide On Screen recording features:® ® 1. Connect the G-LINK cable according to the instructions (see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3. on page 28. 2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television terminals on the TV (see illustration). programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject 3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your you to civil and criminal liability. VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the VCR. 4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system. 5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide On Screen® system. Note: The TV Guide On Screen® system does not receive program listings from or for any satellite service. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 17

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV Connecting a DVD player with S-video, a VCR, and a Cable box You will need: From antenna or Cable TV  one signal splitter IN Cable box Signal splitter  five coaxial cables CH 3 IN OUT  two sets of standard A/V cables OUT CH 4 OUT Stereo VCR Note: If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV (VIDEO 1) to your VCR’s audio out terminal using the white IN from ANT VIDEO AUDIO L R audio cable only. CH 3 CH 4 IN  one S-video cable OUT to TV OUT  one pair of standard audio cables L R TV Note: • If your DVD player does not have S-video, use a standard video cable instead. Do not connect an S-video cable and a standard video cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the picture performance will be unacceptable. • Do not connect the DVD player and VCR to the same set of A/V inputs on the TV. (See the illustration, which shows the VCR connected to VIDEO 1 on the TV, and the DVD player connected to VIDEO 2.) • If your DVD player has component video, see page 19.  To view basic channels and access the TV’s features: Select the ANT 1 video input source.* Use the TV AUDIO controls to change channels and access the TV’s features. OUT L  To view premium Cable channels: S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT R Turn OFF the VCR. Select the ANT 2 video input DVD player with S-video source on the TV.* Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever channel the Cable box output is set to). Use the Cable box controls to change channels. Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1, Note: When you use a Cable box, you may not be able to ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate input use the remote control to program or access certain mode is selected.* features on the TV.  To view the DVD player: Turn ON the DVD player. Select the VIDEO 2 video  To enable the TV Guide On Screen ® system to work with input source on the TV.* your cable box and to use the TV Guide On Screen® recording features:  To view the VCR: 1. Connect the G-LINK® cable according to the instructions on Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input page 28. source on the TV.* 2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT terminals _____________ on the TV (see illustration). * To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control 3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your VCR (see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the VCR. devices, see Chapter 3. 4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of On Screen® system. television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is 5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide On Screen® prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. system. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 18

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream® (component video) and a VCR Your TV has ColorStream® (component video) inputs. From antenna or Cable You will need: Signal splitter IN  one signal splitter OUT OUT  three coaxial cables Stereo VCR  two sets of standard A/V cables VIDEO AUDIO • For better picture performance, if your VCR has S-video, use an IN from ANT L R CH 3 S-video cable (plus audio cables) instead of the standard video CH 4 IN OUT to TV cable. However, do not connect both types of video cable to OUT VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the picture L R performance will be unacceptable. TV • If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV (VIDEO 1) to your VCR’s audio out terminal using the white audio cable only.  one pair of standard audio cables  one set of component video cables • You can connect the component video cables (plus audio cables) from the DVD player to either set of ColorStream terminals on the TV (HD-1 or HD-2). The ColorStream HD-1 and HD-2 terminals can be used with Progressive (480p, 720p) and Interlaced (480i, 1080i) scan systems. A 1080i signal will provide the best picture performance. • If your DVD player does not have component video, see page 18. If your DVD player has HDMI video, see page 21.  To view antenna or Cable channels: AUDIO OUT Y PB PR L Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.* S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO R OUT OUT  To view the DVD player: DVD player with component video Turn ON the DVD player. Select the ColorStream HD-1 video input source on the TV.*  To view the VCR: Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input input mode is selected.* source on the TV.*  To record a TV program while watching a DVD: Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to the channel to  To use the TV Guide On Screen ® recording features: record. Select the ColorStream HD-1 video input source ® 1. Connect the G-LINK cable according to the instructions on the TV* to view the DVD. on page 28. _____________ 2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT * To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control terminals on the TV (see illustration). (see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3. 3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television VCR. programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the 4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject On Screen® system. you to civil and criminal liability. 5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide On Screen® system. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 19

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV Connecting two VCRs You will need: From antenna or Cable  one signal splitter IN ** Signal splitter  three coaxial cables OUT  two sets of standard A/V cables OUT • For better picture performance, if VCR 1 has S-video, use VCR1 (plays) an S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the VIDEO AUDIO standard video cable. However, do not connect both types IN from ANT L R CH 3 IN of video cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time CH 4 OUT to TV or the picture performance will be unacceptable. OUT L R • If VCR 1 has mono audio, connect L/MONO on the TV (VIDEO 1) to the audio out terminal on VCR 1 using the white audio cable TV only. • Do not connect the same VCR to the output and input terminals on a the TV at the same time.  To view the antenna or Cable signal: Select the ANT-1 video input source on the TV.* b  To view VCR 1: Turn ON VCR 1. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source on the TV.*  To dub or edit from VCR 1 to VCR 2: Turn ON both VCRs. Set VCR 2 to the appropriate line VCR2 (records) input (refer to your VCR owner’s manual for details). Select VIDEO AUDIO the VIDEO 1 video input source on the TV.* IN from ANT CH 3 L R IN CH 4 Note: OUT OUT to TV L R • If you have a Cable box, connect the Cable box and splitter to VCR1 L R as shown on page 16. • The VIDEO OUT signal incorporates Macrovision® copyright a The VIDEO OUT terminal does not output the POP picture. protection technology, which may prevent you from recording certain copy-restricted video materials.*** b When POP mode is active, the AUDIO OUT terminals output the sound of the active window (main or POP). For additional information, see “Notes about recording” on page 81. _________________________________________________________________ Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the * To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when (see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other the appropriate input mode is selected.* devices, see Chapter 3. ** Do not connect the TV through a VCR. Video signals fed through VCRs may be affected by copyright protection systems and the picture will be distorted on the TV.  To use the TV Guide On Screen ® recording features: ® 1. Connect the G-LINK cable according to the instructions *** This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by on page 28. U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other 2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT limited pay-per-view uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. terminals on the TV (see illustration). Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Macrovision is a registered trademark of Macrovision Corporation. 3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television VCR. programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the 4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. On Screen® system. 5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide On Screen® system. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 20

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV Connecting an HDMI™ or DVI device to the HDMI input The HDMI[1] input on your TV receives digital audio and __________________________________________________________________ uncompressed digital video from an HDMI device, or [1] HDMI = High-Definition Multimedia Interface. uncompressed digital video from a DVI[2] device. [2] DVI = Digital Video Interface. This input is designed to accept HDCP [3] program material in [3] HDCP = High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection. digital form from EIA/CEA-861/861B–compliant [4] consumer [4] EIA/CEA-861/861B compliance covers the transmission of electronic devices (such as a set-top box or DVD player with uncompressed digital video with high-bandwidth digital content HDMI or DVI output). protection, which is being standardized for reception of high-definition video signals. Because this is an evolving technology, it is possible that The HDMI input is designed for best performance with 720p some devices may not operate properly with the TV. signals but will also accept and display 1080i, 480i, and 480p signals. Note: To ensure that the HDMI or DVI device is reset properly, it is recommended that you follow these NOTE: DO NOT CONNECT A PC USING THE procedures: HDMI PORT. ALWAYS use the TV’S PC IN (VGA) port to connect a PC. • When turning on your electronic components, turn on the TV first, and then the HDMI or DVI device. • When turning off your electronic components, turn off the HDMI or DVI device first, and then the TV. To connect an HDMI device, you will need: • one HDMI cable (type A connector) per HDMI device To connect a DVI device, you will need: For proper operation, it is recommended that you use • one HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable (HDMI type A as short an HDMI cable as possible. You should not connector) per DVI device encounter difficulty if you use an HDMI cable shorter than For proper operation, the length of an HDMI-to-DVI adapter 16.4 ft (5m). cable should not exceed 9.8 ft (3m). The recommended length is HDMI cable transfers both video and audio. Separate 6.6 ft (2m). analog audio cables are not required (see illustration • one pair of standard analog audio cables per DVI below). Some CDVs (video CDs) may not output digital device audio signals. In that case, you may hear sound by connecting analog audio cables. An HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable transfers video only. Separate analog audio cables are required (see illustration See “Setting the HDMI™ audio mode” on page 55. below). See “Setting the HDMI™ audio mode” on page 55. HDMI device DVI device HDMI OUT DVI/HDCP VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO AUDIO OUT L R IN L R IN L R OUT L R OUT R TV TV ___________ HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 21

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV Connecting a device to the TheaterNet OUT infrared terminal using the IR blaster cable for IR pass-through device control You can use the TV’s TheaterNet OUT* infrared terminal Front of IR-controlled DVD player (for example) (IR pass-through) to remotely operate—through the TV—many infrared remote-controlled devices (such as Toshiba infrared remote-controlled VCRs or DVD players) enclosed within an entertainment center or similar cabinet. Without the TheaterNet OUT connection, the device typically would need to be visible to operate it remotely. Front of IR-controlled audio device (for example) You will need:  one dual-wand IR blaster cable (included with your TV)  other audio/video cables as required to connect the device(s) Infrared sensor to the TV (see pages 15–21) To connect the IR blaster cable: IR blaster cable wand (approx. 1 inch from device) 1. Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your device. This sensor is marked on some devices.** Back of TV 2. Align one of the IR blaster cable’s wands about 1 inch away from the infrared sensor on the front of the device and attach it using double-sided mounting tape. If you have a second device, attach the second wand in a similar manner. (See illustration at right.) Note: If you do not have a second device, coil the second wand with a rubber band and leave it behind the TV. 3. Plug the IR blaster cable’s plug into one of the TV’s TheaterNet OUT terminals. To control the device(s): Point the TV remote control (that you previously programmed to operate the device; see Chapter 3) or the device’s remote control at **If you cannot locate the device’s infrared sensor: the front of the TV and press the 1. Turn OFF the device. button for the desired function. TV/VIDEO EXIT CHANNEL VOLUME MENU POWER 2. Starting at the lower left corner of the device, place the end of the The signal passes from the remote device’s remote control (with the infrared emitter) so it touches the control through the TV to the front of the device and press POWER. (Do not use the TV’s remote device via the IR blaster cable. control for this step.) Note: 3. If the device turns on, the point at which the remote control touched • If you use the device’s remote the device is the location of the sensor. control to operate the device, you 4. If the device does not turn on, move the remote control slightly to the also will need to use the TV’s remote control to operate the TV. right and press POWER again. • For additional control options, see “TheaterNet on-screen device 5. Repeat step 4 until you locate the device’s infrared sensor. control” on the next page. ___________ *The TheaterNet OUT function has been verified for use with Toshiba infrared-controlled devices. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 22

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV Connecting an IR receiver/repeater or home theater control system to the TheaterNet IN infrared terminal For additional control options for your home theater system, you can connect an IR receiver/repeater (not included) or a TheaterNet™ on-screen device control home theater control system (not included) to the TV’s For additional control options TheaterNet IN infrared terminal.* for your home theater system, See the Specifications section in the back of this manual for set up the TheaterNet TheaterNet IN terminal requirements. on-screen device control Toshiba Video 3 Contact your home theater electronics dealer for details about feature. You can use this ENTER IR receivers/repeaters and home theater control systems. feature to control many IR TOP MENU EXIT You will need: remote-controlled devices and TV/VIDEO EXIT CHANNEL VOLUME MENU POWER IEEE1394 devices using the  one IR cable on-screen control icons. See pages 50–54 for details on TV back panel setting up and using TheaterNet. See pages 25–27 for details on connecting IEEE1394 devices. Note: The TheaterNet on-screen icons are the only device functions available when the icons are on-screen. To access other device functions, close the TheaterNet icon window. OUT IN Back of IR receiver/repeater or home theater control system* (not included) To operate the TV with this connection, point the Toshiba TV remote control toward the front of the IR receiver/ repeater or home theater control system. TV/VIDEO EXIT CHANNEL VOLUME MENU POWER IR receiver/repeater or home theater control system ___________ *The TheaterNet IN function has been verified for use with SmarTouch™ STS/STS-C wireless RF control systems. Due to the wide variation in remote control operation among manufacturers, these functions may or may not operate with other brands. SmarTouch is a trademark of Crestron Electronics, Inc. (www.crestron.com). Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 23

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV Connecting a digital audio system Dolby Digital decoder or The TV’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal outputs a Dolby* other digital audio system Digital or 2-channel down-mixed PCM (pulse-code modulation) signal for use with an external Dolby Digital LINE IN Optical decoder or other external audio system with optical audio input. L R Audio IN You will need: TV  one optical audio cable (Use an optical audio cable that has the larger “TosLink” connector and not the smaller “mini-optical” connector.) To control the audio: 1. Turn on the TV and the digital audio device. 2. Press MENU on the TV’s remote control and open the AUDIO Audio Audio Settings menu. Advanced Audio Settings Audio Setup 3. Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER. 4. In the Optical Output Format field, select either Dolby Note: Digital or PCM, depending on your device (see “Selecting • Some audio systems may not be compatible with Dolby Digital bitstream the optical audio output format” on page 93). signals. Older audio systems that are not compatible with standard optical out signals may not work properly, creating a high noise level Audio Setup that may damage speakers or headphones. THIS DAMAGE IS NOT MTS Stereo COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY. Language English • The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal outputs signals only when receiving Speakers On digital broadcasts with the TV in single-window mode. Optical Output Format Dolby Digital • The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal may not output some digital audio Reset Done sources because of copy restrictions. 5. Turn off the TV’s built-in speakers in the same Audio Setup ___________ menu (above). Also see “Turning off the built-in speakers” *Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. on page 93. Connecting an analog audio system This connection allows you to use external speakers with an Analog audio amplifier external analog audio amplifier to adjust the sound level. You will need: LINE IN L R  one pair of standard audio cables To control the audio: 1. Turn on the TV and the stereo amplifier. TV 2. Turn off the TV’s built-in speakers (see “Turning off the built-in speakers” on page 93). Note: To hear sound when using an external audio amplifier, the volume of both the TV and the amplifier must be set to a reasonable listening level. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 24

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV Connecting IEEE1394 video devices You can use the two bi-directional IEEE1394 ports on the back Supported signals of your TV to connect digital video devices that meet CEA specifications for IEEE1394. The IEEE1394 ports support only the signals listed below. Even though incompatible video, audio, and digital control signals Because these ports are bi-directional, they can be used for both cannot be decoded by the TV, these signals may be passed playback and recording. through the IEEE1394 cable to other compatible devices. • Because IEEE1394 is an evolving technology, it is possible that some Incompatible devices may not appear in the TheaterNet™ menu. or all of the connectivity features of a device you connect to the TV through the IEEE1394 ports may not operate. You should confirm • MPEG-2 digital video signals that the devices you want to use with the IEEE1394 ports will operate Other digital video signals—such as DV video—are with those ports. incompatible and must be decoded by the source device and • This TV does not support all possible IEEE1394 signal types. For sent to the TV as analog video (composite or S-video). information on signals supported by the IEEE1394 ports, see • Dolby Digital and MPEG digital audio signals “Supported signals” at right. Other digital audio signals (such as DPM, MP3, and DTS) are • IEEE1394 cable carries both audio and video information; incompatible and cannot be decoded by the TV. separate audio cables are not required. • EIA-775 and AV/C digital control You will need:  one (or two) IEEE1394 cables Your TV can serve as the control center for many devices Note: The transmission capability of IEEE1394 cable used with this that are compatible with EIA-775 or AV/C IEEE1394 TV must be S400 (400 Mbps maximum). control standards (described below).  additional A/V cables if your device is analog-compatible The TV cannot control IEEE1394 devices that use any other (see “Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices” below). control standards. TV back panel – EIA-775 digital control allows tuning devices (such as Cable boxes) to send simple graphics; however, this standard does not allow the TV to control the Cable box through IEEE1394. – AV/C (audio/video control) provides basic control (such as power, play, stop, rewind, fast-forward, pause, and record), as applicable to the specific device. Using TheaterNet™ on-screen device } control You can use the TheaterNet feature to control some IEEE1394 Two bi-directional devices using on-screen control icons. See page 50 for details on IEEE1394 ports setting up and using the TheaterNet feature. From IEEE1394 devices (such as Note: If the TheaterNet feature does not control your AVHD or D-VHS) IEEE1394 device, you can either use the device’s remote control or try using IR pass-through with the TV’s remote Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices control (page 22). Some digital IEEE1394 devices are compatible with analog signals. For example, some D-VHS VCRs can record and play VHS or S-VHS format videos. Such devices allow you to play analog tapes that you rented or recorded, or record analog programs from antenna or Cable TV systems. To use the IEEE1394 device’s analog features, you need to connect the device to the TV using standard A/V cables (or S-video plus audio cables) in addition to connecting the IEEE1394 cable. Note: If you have an IEEE1394 device connected to both digital and analog inputs on the TV, the TV automatically switches between digital and analog modes, as needed, when the initial device access is initiated using the TheaterNet button. See page 50 for details on using the TheaterNet feature. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 25

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV Connecting IEEE1394 video devices (continued) Connecting an AVHD (external hard IEEE1394 device initialization drive) or D-VHS digital recorder When you connect a new IEEE1394 device to the TV and turn it on, the device immediately announces its presence to the TV You can connect an IEEE1394-compatible D-VHS or AVHD (and other networked IEEE1394 devices, if any), and the “New (audio/video hard drive) digital recorder (such as Toshiba’s IEEE1394 Device Initialization” screen (shown in step 2, below) Symbio™ AVHD Recorder) to record high definition and automatically appears. standard definition material from either tuner and control live Note: With some devices, it may take up to one minute for the TV (pause, rewind, etc.). IEEE1394 Device Initialization screen to appear. When you connect an AVHD or D-VHS device to the TV: 1. If you also connected your IEEE1394 device to an analog • The remote control keys (LIVE, REW, PAUSE, PLAY, etc.) are input, use the yzx • buttons to select the input in the automatically activated to allow control of live TV. ANALOG INPUT USED field; otherwise, leave it set to • The TV Guide On Screen® system is automatically configured to “None.” (See “Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices” allow recording to the device.* See Chapters 5 and 7 for details. on page 25.) Also see page 55 for details on setting the AVHD device skip time. 2. To label the device, highlight Edit Label and press ENTER. • Some programs may not be recorded due to copy protection New IEEE1394 Device Initilization restrictions. Manufacturer TOSHIBA Device Type AVHD Custom Label This TV is compatible with the new Toshiba TM Edit Label Done 3. Press the yzx • buttons to select a character for the first Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorder! space and then press ENTER. Toshiba’s Symbio™ AVHD Recorder is designed specifically for high definition television (HDTV) and offers control over digital 4. Repeat step 3 to enter the rest of the characters. video recording and playback. 5. Highlight Done and press ENTER to save the information. Think of it as a “tapeless VCR” for digital television. You can pause, IEEE1394 Device Label Edit rewind, or use instant replay, so you’ll never miss a thing! MY DEVICE_ Symbio also offers one-touch recording* of both standard and A B C D E F G High Definition programs through the no-fee TV Guide H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U On Screen® interactive program guide built in to this TV. V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SPC CLR BS The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the Cancel Done Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. Note: *To enjoy the full benefits of your Symbio AVHD Recorder, you must first set • The TV may not recognize incompatible or non-A/V IEEE1394 up the TV Guide On Screen® system (see Chapter 5). Full Symbio AVHD devices; however, these devices may still be available to other Recorder benefits, including Intelligent One Touch recording, will not be compatible IEEE1394 devices on the network. available unless the TV Guide On Screen® system is fully operational. • You may be able to use the TV’s remote control to operate some However, even if the TV Guide On Screen® system is not fully operational, compatible IEEE1394 devices. You must first program the manual recording is available as long as the TV Guide On Screen® system remote control to recognize the device (see Chapter 3). If you has acquired the necessary date and time data. If you experience any have an IEEE1394 Cable box or satellite receiver, you may need issues with your Symbio AVHD Recorder, please contact Toshiba to use the remote control that came with the device. Consumer Solutions by calling (800) 631-3811 or visiting • Toshiba is not liable for the operation of any IEEE1394 device http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp. other than the Toshiba Symbio AVHD recorder. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 26

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV Connecting IEEE1394 video devices (continued) IEEE1394 device management Important information regarding The IEEE1394 device information is saved in the TV’s memory. IEEE1394 device interconnection You can edit this device information (for example, edit the • Never loop the last device in the chain back to the TV. device name, change the analog input information, or delete the If the device chain is looped, the TV may not work properly with the device information from the TV’s memory if you no longer use other devices in the chain. that device). • Always place devices with the slowest communication speed at the end of each chain. If a device with a slower To edit the IEEE1394 device information: communication speed is placed ahead of a faster device in the 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. chain, the signal from the slower device will interfere with the signal 2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of from the faster device. To determine the communication speed of an IEEE1394 device, look for an “S” number near the device’s Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in IEEE1394 connector. The higher the “S” number, the faster the step 3 below). device. If your device is not marked with an “S” number, look in the device’s user manual or call the device manufacturer’s technical support number. Setup Installation • If your IEEE1394 device has a two-position power Sleep Timer On/Off Timer switch, always place the device at the end of the chain PC Settings and turn ON the power switch when any device is used. HDMI 1 Audio Auto HDMI 2 Audio Auto If the power switch is OFF, it will interfere with signals from devices Slide Show Interval 2 Sec behind it in the chain. Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit • The maximum length for an IEEE1394 cable between each device is 15 feet. 3. Open the Devices menu, highlight IEEE1394 Devices, and • This TV is an IEEE1394A device. The IEEE1394B protocol is faster press ENTER. and intended to allow for longer distances between devices and multi-room systems. IEEE1394A–to–IEEE1394B converters (available at some electronics suppliers) may allow compatibility of Devices IEEE1394B devices with your existing IEEE1394A devices. IEEE1394 Devices TheaterNet Devices • The transmission capability of IEEE1394 cable used with this TV must be S400 (400 Mbps maximum). Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit 4. Highlight the device you want to edit and press ENTER. IEEE1394 Device Management Brand Type Label Analog Input Used Connected TOSHIBA AVHD MY DEVICE None No Reset Done 5. Follow the on-screen prompts to modify the device information. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 27

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV G-LINK® connection • This connection is necessary for the TV Guide On Screen® system to work with your cable box to receive program listings and to enable the TV Guide On Screen® recording features with your VCR. • This connection is not necessary for AVHD or D-VHS recording devices. See pages 26 and 55 for further details. After you connect your devices to the TV, you will need to connect the G-LINK ® cable (either of the dual-wand IR blaster cables included with your TV) from your VCR and Cable box (if applicable) to the G-LINK® terminal on the TV. Note: TV Guide On Screen® program data is available through the ANT-1 and ANT-2 antenna inputs and also through the VIDEO 1 inputs if you have a cable box connected to VIDEO 1. TV Guide On Screen® program data is not available through any other inputs on this TV. See the connection information on pages 15–27. The G-LINK® connection is necessary to enable the following features of your TV Guide On Screen® system: • If you have a Cable box, you must connect the G-LINK® cable from the Cable box to the G-LINK® terminal to receive the TV Guide On Screen® program listings for your Cable service. • If you have a VCR, you must connect the G-LINK® cable from the VCR to the G-LINK® terminal to use the TV Guide On Screen® recording features. To connect to the G-LINK® terminal: Front of Cable box 1. Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your VCR or Cable box. The sensor is marked on some devices.* 2. Align one of the G-LINK® (IR blaster) cable’s wands about 1 inch away from the infrared sensor on the front of the VCR and attach it using double-sided mounting tape. Front of VCR If you have a Cable box, attach the other wand in a similar manner. (See illustration at right.) Note: If you do not have a Cable box, coil the second wand with a rubber band and leave it behind the TV. Infrared 3. Plug the G-LINK® (IR blaster) cable’s plug into the TV’s sensor G-LINK® terminal. G-LINK® (IR blaster) cable wand For details on setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system: (approx. 1 inch from device) See Chapter 5. Back of TV For details on using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide: See Chapter 7. * If you cannot locate the device’s infrared sensor: 1. Turn OFF the device. 2. Starting at the lower left corner of the device, place the end of the device’s remote control (with the infrared emitter) so it touches the front of the device and press POWER. (Do not use the TV’s remote control for this step.) 3. If the device turns on, the point at which the remote control touched the device is the location of the sensor. 4. If the device does not turn on, move the remote control slightly to the right and press POWER again. 5. Repeat step 4 until you locate the device’s infrared sensor. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 28

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV Connecting a personal computer (PC) This connection allows you to view the image from a PC TV on the TV screen. When connecting a PC to the TV, use an analog RGB (15-pin) computer cable and a PC audio cable. – To use a PC, set the monitor output resolution on the PC before connecting it to the TV. The following signals can be displayed: • VGA: 640 × 480 @ 60Hz • SVGA: 800 × 600 @ 60Hz • XGA: 1024 × 768 @ 60Hz Other formats or non-standard signals may not be displayed correctly. PC audio cable – To display the optimum picture, use the PC setting Computer feature (see “Using the PC setting feature” on page 95). PC audio output Signal names for mini D-sub 15-pin connector Pin assignment for RGB/PC terminal 5 1 Conversion adapter 10 6 (if necessary) 15 11 Note: Pin No. Signal name • Some PC models cannot be connected to this TV. 1 R • An adapter is not needed for computers with a DOS/V compatible mini D-sub 15-pin terminal. 2 G • Depending on the DVD’s title and the specifications of the PC on which 3 B you are playing the DVD-Video, some scenes may be skipped or you 4 NC (not connected) may not be able to pause during multi-angle scenes. 5 NC 6 Ground 7 Ground 8 Ground 9 NC 10 Ground 11 NC 12 NC 13 H-sync 14 V-sync 15 NC Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 29

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV Connecting a home network The Toshiba Home Interactive Network Connection (THINC®) feature allows you to network the TV with your home PC (personal computer), which will allow access to the TV’s file sharing and e-mail scheduling features. ■ File sharing See Chapters 10 and 11 for details on configuring You can access JPEG and MP3 files that are stored on your networked home PC and using e-mail scheduling, and view/play them on the TV. file sharing, the JPEG Picture • Connect your TV to your PC /network according to either Example #1 or Example #2, below left. Viewer, and the MP3 Audio Player. • Does NOT require Internet/e-mail service. Note: ■ E-mail scheduling of recordings and reminders • The TV’s home network feature is compatible only with Microsoft® You can schedule recordings and reminders by sending an e- Windows® 2000 and the Home or Professional version of Microsoft® Windows® XP Service Pack 1 and Service Pack 2. See Chapter 11 mail to the TV from any PC. (This connection also allows access for details. to file sharing.) • The TV’s home network connection allows access to e-mail • Connect your TV to your home network according to Example #3, scheduling and file sharing only. You will NOT be able to use below right. the TV to access the Internet. • Requires the following: • If you use an Ethernet crossover cable to connect your PC directly to – Home Internet service. the TV, you will not be able to use the automatic setup and must – A dedicated POP3 e-mail address for the TV (different from manually set up the network address. your personal e-mail address). • If you use a hub or switch to connect the TV to your home network, – A compatible recording device. you will not be able to use the automatic setup and must manually • Contact your ISP (Internet Service Provider) to obtain and set up set up the network address. Internet/e-mail service. • If you use a router with built-in DHCP functionality, use the • See Chapter 2 for recording device connection instructions. automatic setup. Manual setup may not work. Example #1: Connecting the TV to a home network Example #3: Connecting the TV to a home network without an Internet connection with an Internet connection (for file sharing only) TV back panel (for e-mail scheduling and file sharing) You will need: You will need:  two or more standard  one coaxial or telephone cable (depending on your modem) Ethernet (RJ-45)  three standard Ethernet (RJ-45) cables cables (the number of  one Ethernet router/switch[1] cables depends on the Hub or switch  one modem (DSL or cable)[1] TV back panel number of PCs you connect to your PC network)  one hub or switch PC Modem (DSL or cable) Router/switch [1] Example #2: Connecting the TV directly to a PC without an Internet connection TV back panel [3] (for file sharing only) [2] [3] You will need:  one Ethernet crossover Cable or phone jack [4] cable (i.e., a PC-to-PC [3] direct file transfer cable) Ethernet crossover _____________ PC Note: Do NOT use PC cable [1] Your router/switch may be part of your DSL or cable modem. Your switch standard Ethernet cable may be separate from your router. For assistance, contact your ISP or an IT with this connection. professional. [2] Coaxial or telephone cable (depending on your modem type) [3] Standard Ethernet (RJ-45) cable Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation [4] Do NOT connect a phone jack directly to the TV’s RJ-45 (Ethernet) port. in the United States and/or other countries. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 30

3 Using the remote control Learning about the remote control The buttons used for operating the TV only are described here. For a complete list of the remote control’s functions, see the remote control functional key chart on pages 34–35. For a list of the buttons that operate the TV Guide On Screen® system, see page 59. POWER turns the TV on and off. Press POWER to turn on the TV. The red LED indicator on the TV front touchpad will be illuminated. Press POWER again to turn off the TV. Note: The Quick Restart™ setting will affect the amount of time it takes for the picture to appear when you turn on the TV. See page 56 for details. SLEEP accesses the sleep timer (page 94). LIGHT The first press of the LIGHT button lights the keypad and turns on the Illumination mode. With the Illumination mode on, pressing any key lights the keypad for 5 seconds (10 seconds if you’re in programming mode). Subsequent presses of the LIGHT button toggle between turning the Illumination mode on and off. Channel Numbers (0–9, –/100) directly tune channels. The “–” button is used to tune digital channels (page 76) or to display the favorite channel list (page 49). INPUT selects the video input source (page 72). MODE cycles through the six remote control device modes: TV, CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO1, and AUDIO2. The mode indicator light will remain lit for a few seconds (page 33). PIC SIZE cycles through the five pictures sizes: Natural, TheaterWide 1/2/3, and Full (page 77). TheaterNet™ DEVICE displays a list of available TheaterNet devices (page 50). TheaterNet™ CTRL accesses the on-screen IR device control icons (page 51). MENU accessesthe main TV menu system (pages 40 and 41) or opens a menu in the TV Guide On Screen® system (Chapter 7). TV GUIDE opens the TV Guide On Screen® system (Chapter 7). INFO provides detailed information on highlighted items in the TV Guide On Screen® system (Chapter 7). ENTER activates highlighted items in the main menu system and the TV Guide On Screen® system. When a menu is on-screen, these buttons select or Arrow buttons (yz x •) adjust programming menus. (Also see x / • on the next page.) CH yz cycles through programmed channels when no menu is on-screen (page 47) and functions as page up/down when a menu is on-screen or when the Note: The message “Not Available” TV Guide On Screen® system is open (Chapter 7). will appear if you press a key for a (Continued on next page) function that is not available Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 31

Chapter 3: Using the remote control Learning about the remote control (continued) VOL yz adjusts the volume level. EXIT closes on-screen menus and the TV Guide On Screen® system. CH RTN returns to the last viewed channel (page 76), or stops the picture viewer slide show (page 104). Live returns viewing of the TV back to the live program, while continuing to record to the Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD recorder (pages 26 and 55). RECALL displays TV setting information on-screen (page 96). MUTE reduces or turns off the sound (page 90). TV/VCR selects TV mode to view one program while recording another. SKIP SS| and |TT jump forward and backward one day in the TV Guide On Screen® listings (Chapter 7). LIST displays the Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD recorder play list (if available) (page 26). FAV CH yz tunes to the next higher/lower favorite channel (page 49). HOME ( ) accesses the home function of the Channel Browser™ feature (page 75) x/ • While watching TV, these buttons open the Channel Browser banner and tune to the previous/next channel in the channel history (page 74). (Also see “Arrow buttons” on previous page.) SPLIT turnsthe POP feature on and off (page 81) or locks/unlocks the TV Guide On Screen® video window (page 60). PIC MODE selects the picture mode (page 84). Remote control effective range FAV SCAN accesses the favorite channel search function (page 83). For optimum performance, aim the remote FREEZE accesses the freeze feature (page 83). control directly at the TV and make sure there is no obstruction between the remote control and the TV. Point remote control toward remote sensor on front of TV. 16.4 ft (5m) Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 32

Chapter 3: Using the remote control Installing the remote control batteries To install the remote control batteries: Caution: Caution: Always dispose of batteries in a designated disposal location. Never throw batteries into a fire. Never throw batteries into a fire. Note: 1. Slide the battery cover off the back of the remote control. • Be sure to use AA size batteries. • Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area. • Batteries should always be disposed of with the environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. • If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if the 2. Install two “AA” size alkaline batteries. Match the + and – symbols on operating range becomes reduced, replace the batteries the batteries to the symbols on the battery compartment. with new ones. • When necessary to replace batteries in the remote control, always replace both batteries with new ones. Never mix battery types or use new and used batteries in combination. • Always remove the batteries from the remote control if they are dead or if the remote control will not be used 3. Slide the battery cover on to the remote control until the lock snaps. for an extended period of time. This will prevent battery acid from leaking into the battery compartment. Using the remote control MODE button to control your other devices Your TV remote control has one dedicated TV mode and five programmable multi-brand modes: CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, and AUDIO 2. The default device modes and programmable device modes are listed below. Note: The TV remote control is preprogrammed to operate most Toshiba devices. If you own a non-Toshiba device or a Toshiba device that the remote control is not Number (1-6) preprogrammed to operate, you will need to program the remote control. See “Programming the remote control to operate your other devices” on page 36. MODE MODE Default device mode control (before programming) 1) TV Toshiba TV 2) CBL/SAT Toshiba Satellite receiver 3) VCR/PVR Toshiba VCR 4) DVD Toshiba DVD 5) AUDIO 1 Pioneer Audio receiver 6) AUDIO 2 Pioneer LD MODE Device mode control after programming Note: 1) TV Toshiba TV Although the TV remote control includes codes 2) CBL/SAT for many devices, it may not include codes for some or all of the features on certain devices 3) VCR/PVR you wish to control. If you are unable to 4) DVD Multi-brand video/audio devices program the TV remote control to operate your 5) AUDIO 1 device or some of the features on that device, use the device’s remote control or the control 6) AUDIO 2 buttons on the device. You can directly select the device mode by pressing the corresponding number button (1–6) while pressing the MODE button. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 33

Chapter 3: Using the remote control Remote Control functional key chart REMOTE REMOTE CONTROL DEVICE MODE CONTROL TV CBL/SAT CBL/SAT DVD AUDIO 1 or 2 AUDIO 1 or 2 VCR/PVR VCR/PVR KEY (Toshiba TV) (Cable Box) (Satellite Box) (LD) (Receiver) (CD Player) (VCR) (PVR) MODE Toggles among the remote control device modes LIGHT Lights the remote key, and toggles between enabled and disabled Illumination mode.*1 SLEEP Sleep timer --- --- --- --- --- --- --- POWER Power Power Power Power Power Power Power Power 1 Digit 1 Digit 1 Digit 1 Digit 1 AV input 1 Digit 1 Digit 1 Digit 1 2 Digit 2 Digit 2 Digit 2 Digit 2 AV input 2 Digit 2 Digit 2 Digit 2 3 Digit 3 Digit 3 Digit 3 Digit 3 AV input 3 Digit 3 Digit 3 Digit 3 4 Digit 4 Digit 4 Digit 4 Digit 4 AV input 4 Digit 4 Digit 4 Digit 4 5 Digit 5 Digit 5 Digit 5 Digit 5 CD Digit 5 Digit 5 Digit 5 6 Digit 6 Digit 6 Digit 6 Digit 6 Tuner Digit 6 Digit 6 Digit 6 7 Digit 7 Digit 7 Digit 7 Digit 7 Phono Digit 7 Digit 7 Digit 7 8 Digit 8 Digit 8 Digit 8 Digit 8 Cassette Digit 8 Digit 8 Digit 8 9 Digit 9 Digit 9 Digit 9 Digit 9 Aux Digit 9 Digit 9 Digit 9 0 Digit 0 Digit 0 Digit 0 Digit 0 --- Digit 0, 10 Digit 0 Digit 0 100/– – (digital --- – (sub +10 --- --- 100 --- - separator) channel) INPUT TV/Video TV TV TV TV TV TV TV select PIC SIZE Selects the TV TV TV TV TV TV TV image shape MENU/ Menu/ --- Action, Menu --- --- --- Menu ACTION Guide Menu Menu TV GUIDE/SETUP TV Guide --- Guide DVD setup --- --- --- Guide INFO/ Guide Info --- INFO Top menu --- --- --- INFO TOP MENU TheaterNet TheaterNet --- --- Subtitle --- --- --- ADVANCE DEVICE/SUBTITLE Device TheaterNet TheaterNet --- --- Audio --- --- --- --- CTRL/AUDIO Control ENTER Enter --- Enter, Select Enter --- --- --- Enter y Menu select --- Menu select Menu select --- --- --- Menu select up up up up z Menu select --- Menu select Menu select --- --- --- Menu select down down down down x• Menu select --- Menu select Menu select --- --- --- Menu select left/right left/right left/right left/right EXIT/ Exit --- Exit DVD clear --- --- --- Exit DVD CLEAR CH yz Channel Channel Channel --- Channel --- Channel Channel PAGE +/– up/down, up/down up/down up/down up/down up/down Page up/down VOL yz Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 CH RTN/ Previous Previous Previous DVD --- --- --- --- DVD RTN channel channel channel return Live Live --- --- --- --- --- --- Live TV RECALL On-screen --- --- On-screen --- --- --- --- display display Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 34

Chapter 3: Using the remote control Remote Control functional key chart (continued) REMOTE REMOTE CONTROL DEVICE MODE CONTROL TV CBL/SAT CBL/SAT DVD AUDIO 1 or 2 AUDIO 1 or 2 VCR/PVR VCR/PVR KEY (Toshiba TV) (Cable Box) (Satellite Box) (LD) (Receiver) (CD Player) (VCR) (PVR) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 MUTE Sound mute* Sound mute* Sound mute* Sound mute* Sound mute* Sound mute* Sound mute* Sound mute*2 SLOW x Slow FWD Slow FWD Slow FWD --- --- --- --- --- • Slow REW --- --- SKIP x Skip FWD Skip FWD Skip FWD --- --- --- --- --- • Skip REW Skip REW Skip REW REW Rewind --- --- Rewind --- Rewind Rewind Rewind PAUSE/STEP Pause --- --- Pause --- Pause Pause Pause PLAY Play --- --- Play --- Play Play Play FF Fast FWD --- --- Fast FWD --- Fast FWD Fast FWD Fast FWD TV/VCR --- --- TV/SAT --- --- --- TV/VCR Reverse DISC/AM/FM --- --- --- Disc shift AM/FM Disc shift --- Replay STOP Stop --- --- Stop --- Stop Stop Stop REC REC Menu --- --- --- --- --- Record Record (Single Click) (Double Click) (Double Click) LIST LIST --- --- --- --- --- --- --- FAV CH yz FAV channel --- --- --- --- --- --- --- up/down HOME HOME --- --- --- --- --- --- --- SPLIT Split TV TV TV TV TV TV TV PIC MODE PIC MODE TV TV TV TV TV TV TV FAV SCAN FAV SCAN --- --- --- --- --- --- --- FREEZE Freeze TV TV TV TV TV TV TV Notes: --- = key does not send a signal in that remote control device mode. <———— TV = key will affect the TV, even when the remote control is not in the “TV” device mode. * 1 The backlight key is a toggle key and does not send an IR signal. * 2 By default (factory setting), the remote control’s volume keys (VOL yz and MUTE) are “locked” to the “TV” device mode. The remote control will operate the TV’s volume, even when “TV” is not the current device mode. (This includes all remote control device modes except AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2). If you unlock the remote control’s volume keys, each device mode will have its own volume (if the device ID has volume data). The remote control will operate the volume of the device associated with the current device mode. (This includes all remote control device modes.) If you lock the remote control’s volume keys to a specific device mode, the remote control will operate the volume of the device associated with the locked mode, even when the locked mode is not the current device mode. (This includes all device modes except AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2). When the remote control is in AUDIO1 (or AUDIO 2) mode, the remote control will operate the volume of the device associated with the AUDIO 1 (or AUDIO 2) mode, even when the volume is locked to another mode. See “Using the remote control MODE button to control your other devices” on page 33 and “Using the volume lock feature” on page 37. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 35

Chapter 3: Using the remote control Programming the remote control to operate your other devices Device code setup Searching and sampling the code 1. Find the code for your device brand in the remote control of a device (8500) device code table on pages 38–39. If you do not know the device code for a particular device, you If more than one code is listed, try each one separately until can cycle the remote control through the available codes for that you find one that works. device mode and sample the functions to find the code that 2. Press MODE until the mode indicator for the device operates the target device. The keys available to be sampled, (CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, or AUDIO 2) provided they are applicable to that mode, are POWER, 1, lights up. VOL y, CH y, and PLAY. Invalid keys will be ignored while in 3. While holding down the RECALL button, press the program mode. Number buttons to enter the four-digit code for your To cycle through each available device code and sample its device. functions: • If a valid code is entered, the mode indicator will blink 1. Press MODE to select the mode you want to set up. two times. 2. While holding down RECALL, press 8, 5, 0, 0. The remote • If an invalid code is entered, the mode indicator will blink control will enter program mode. one long blink. 3. Point the remote control at the target device and press 4. Point the remote control at the device and press POWER POWER (or other function buttons that are available to be to test the code. sampled). • If the device responds to the remote control, you have 4. If the device responds to the remote control: entered the correct code. Press RECALL to store the device code. The mode • If the device does not respond to the remote control, indicator will blink two times and the remote control repeat steps 3 and 4 using another code. will exit the program mode. Note: After programming the remote control, make sure all If the device does not respond to the remote control: necessary keys on the TV remote control (in addition to POWER) operate your device. If some keys are not Press y, and then press POWER. Repeat this step until operational, repeat the device code setup using another code the device responds to the remote control, and then press (if other codes are listed for your device). If, after trying all RECALL. listed codes, the necessary keys do not operate your device, Note: When a search cycle is completed, the mode use the device’s original remote control. indicator will blink three times. The remote control will 5. To control the TV, repeatedly press MODE to select “TV.” begin to cycle through the available codes again. If no key is pressed within 10 seconds during programming, the Note: remote control will exit the program mode and return to • Although the TV remote control includes codes for many devices, it may the previous code. not include codes for some or all of the features on certain devices you want to control. If you are unable to program the TV remote control to operate your device or some of the features on that device, use the POWER device’s original remote control (or the control buttons on the device). Numbers • Every time you change the batteries you will need to reprogram the remote control. MODE • Some newer VCRs respond to either of two codes. These VCRs have a switch labeled “VCR1/VCR2.” If your VCR has this kind of switch and does not respond to the codes for your VCR brand, set the switch to the other position (“VCR1” or “VCR2”) and reprogram the remote control. y CH y VOL y RECALL Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 36

Chapter 3: Using the remote control Programming the remote control to operate your other devices (continued) Using the volume lock feature (8000) Operational feature reset (8900) By default (factory setting), the remote control’s volume keys This feature clears all programmed remote control features not (VOL yz and MUTE) are locked to the “TV” device mode. related to “Device code setup” and resets the volume lock to the The remote control will operate the TV’s volume, even when “TV” device mode. “TV” is not the current device mode. (This includes all remote To reset the remote control: control device modes except AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2). While holding down the RECALL button, press 8, 9, 0, 0. If you unlock the remote control’s volume keys, each device The mode indicator will blink two times, pause, and then mode will have its own volume (if the device ID has volume blink two more times. data). The remote control will operate the volume of the device associated with the current device mode. (This includes all remote control device modes.) If you lock the remote control’s volume keys to a specific device mode, the remote control will operate the volume of the device associated with the locked mode, even when the locked mode is Numbers not the current device mode. (This includes all device modes MODE except AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2). When the remote control is in AUDIO1 (or AUDIO 2) mode, the remote control will operate the volume of the device associated with the AUDIO 1 (or AUDIO 2) mode, even when the volume is locked to another mode. See “Using the remote control MODE button to control your VOL yz other devices” on page 33. RECALL To lock the remote control’s volume keys to a specific mode (CBL/SAT in this example): 1. Repeatedly press MODE to select CBL/SAT mode. 2. While holding down the RECALL button, press 8, 0, 0, 0. 3. Press VOL y.The CBL/SAT mode indicator will blink two times (locked). The remote control’s volume keys will now operate the volume of the device associated with the CBL/SAT mode, even when CBL/SAT is not the current device mode (for all device modes except AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2). To unlock the remote control’s volume keys: 1. While holding down RECALL, press 8, 0, 0, 0. 2. Press VOL z. The CBL/SAT mode indicator will blink four times (unlocked). Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 37

Chapter 3: Using the remote control Multi-brand remote control device codes VCRs/PVRs VCRs/PVRs (cont.) Cable boxes Brand Code Brand Code Brand Code ADMIRAL 0135 PHILCO 0131, 0124, 0127, ABC 1124 AIWA 0127, 0132, 0181 0123, 0126, 0120, ARCHER 1132, 1125 AKAI 0129, 0114, 0115, 0143 CABLEVIEW 1105, 1132 0116 PHILIPS 0131, 0123, 0124, CITIZEN 1122, 1105 AUDIO DYNAMIC 0139, 0111 0173 CURTIS 1112, 1113 BELL&HOWELL 0105, 0113 PIONEER 0123 DIAMOND 1124, 1132, 1125 BROKSONIC 0120, 0126, 0180 PROSCAN 0145, 0100, 0123, EAGLE 1129 CANON 0123, 0125 0124, 0131, 0146, EASTERN 1134 CCE 0143 0101, 0102, 0133 GCBRAND 1132, 1105 CITIZEN 0106 QUASAR 0121, 0122, 0123, GEMINI 1122, 1143 CRAIG 0105, 0129, 0106 0124 G.I. (GENERAL 1119, 1124, 1125, CURTIS MATHES 0145, 0124, 0127 RADIO SHACK 0133, 0124, 0105, INSTRUMENT) 1126, 1127, 1120, DAEWOO 0143, 0101, 0124, 0136, 0109, 0140, 1121, 1122, 1111, 0175 0127 1123, 1152 DBX 0139, 0110, 0111 RCA 0133, 0145, 0100, HAMLIN 1140, 1141, 1142, DIMENSIA 0145 0123, 0124, 0131, 1145, 1118, 1112 EMERSON 0143, 0126, 0119, 0146, 0101, 0102, HITACHI 1103, 1124 0103, 0125, 0142, 0170, 0172, 0174, JERROLD 1119, 1124, 1125, 0120, 0118 0176, 0183 1126, 1127, 1120, FISHER 0105, 0108, 0109, REALISTIC 0124, 0105, 0136, 1121, 1122, 1111, 0107, 0113, 0165 0109, 0140, 0127 1123, 1152 FUNAI 0127, 0126, 0120, Replay TV 7102 MACOM 1103, 1104, 1105, 0134 SAMSUNG 0137, 0102, 0104, 1108 GE 0133, 0145, 0124 0133 MAGNAVOX 1133 GO VIDEO 0137, 0151, 0163, SAMTRON 0163 MEMOREX 1130 0149, 0150, 0182 SANSUI 0139, 0126, 0120, MOTOROLA 1119, 1124, 1125, GOLDSTAR 0106 0152 1126, 1127, 1120, GRADIENTE 0170, 0171, 0168, SANYO 0105, 0109, 0113 1121, 1122, 1111, 0134, 0156 SCOTT 0101, 0102, 0104, 1123, 1152 HITACHI 0123, 0145, 0100, 0109, 0138, 0140, MOVIETIME 1132, 1105 0127, 0168 0147, 0148, 0126 OAK 1139, 1137, 1102 INSTANT REPLAY 0124, 0123 SEARS 0105, 0106, 0107, PANASONIC 1109, 1110, 1114, JENSEN 0139 0108, 0100 1151, 1153 JVC 0139, 0110, 0111, SHARP 0135, 0136, 0167, PHILIPS 1128, 1129, 1130, 0134, 0157, 0158, 0162 1106, 1107, 1150, 0184, 0185, 7104 SHINTOM 0117 1131 KENWOOD 0139, 0110, 0106, SIGNATURE 2000 0127, 0135 PIONEER 1101, 1116 0111 SINGER 0117 PULSAR 1105, 1132 LG 0159 SONY 0128, 0129, 0130, PUSER 1132 LXI 0127, 0106, 0100, 0153, 0154, 0155, RCA 1115 0107, 0108, 0105, 7101 REALISTIC 1132 0109 SV2000 0127 REGAL 1112, 1118, 1140, MAGNAVOX 0131, 0123, 0124, SYLVANIA 0131, 0123, 0124, 1141, 1142, 1145, 0173 0127, 0178 1149 MARANTZ 0139, 0110, 0111 SYMPHONIC 0127, 0168, 0177 REGENCY 1134 MARTA 0106 TASHIRO 0106 REMBRANT 1137, 1132, 1105, MEMOREX 0124, 0109 TATUNG 0139, 0110, 0111 1138 MGA 0138, 0140, 0147, TEAC 0139, 0110, 0127, SAMSUNG 1105 0148, 0141, 0142 0111 SCIENTIFIC 1111, 1112, 1113 MINOLTA 0100, 0145 TECHNICS 0121, 0122, 0123, AMERICAN MITSUBISHI 0138, 0140, 0147, 0124 SLMARK 1105, 1101 0148, 0141, 0142, TEKNICA 0124, 0127, 0112 SPRUCER 1105, 1110 0161, 0164 THOMSON 0179, 0183 STARGATE 1132, 1105 MULTITECH 0147, 0127, 0104 Tivo 7100, 7101 TELECAPTION 1148 NEC 0139, 0110, 0111, TOSHIBA 0101, 0146, 0166, TELEVIEW 1101, 1105 0134 0160 TEXSCAN 1144 OLYMPIC 0124, 0123 VECTOR RESEARCH 0111 TOCOM 1135, 1136, 1147 OPTIMUS 0128, 0121, 0135, WARDS 0135, 0136, 0109, TOSHIBA 1104, 1146 0106 0144, 0106 UNIKA 1132, 1125 ORION 0126, 0120, 0132 YAMAHA 0105, 0139, 0110, UNIVERSAL 1122, 1132 PANASONIC 0123, 0124, 0121, 0111 VIDEOWAY 1106 0122 ZENITH 0144, 0106, 0169, VIEWSTAR 1129, 1130 PENNEY 0124, 0100, 0145, 0180 ZENITH 1117, 1100 0105, 0139, 0110, ZENITH/DRAKE 1100 0111 SATELLITE PENTAX 0100, 0111, 0145 Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 38

Chapter 3: Using the remote control Multi-brand remote control device codes (continued) CD players Receivers (cont.) DVD players Brand Code Brand Code Brand Code ADMIRAL 6126 PIONEER 4105, 4107, 4150 AIWA 3123 AIWA 6133, 6135 QUASAR 4119, 4118, 4121 APEX 3120 CARVER 6129 RCA 4103, 4105, 4127, DENON 3100, 3117 DENON 6142, 6151 4131, 4130, 4149 FERGUSON 3101 EMERSON 6139 SANSUI 4103, 4111, 4139 HITACHI 3111 FISHER 6105, 6106 SHARP 4134, 4137 JVC 3109 GARRARD 6117 SONY 4122 KENWOOD 3115, 3129 HARMAN/KARDON 6120, 6121, 6123, SOUNDE-SIGH 4138 KONKA 3119 6119 TEAC 4112, 4113, 4111, MITSUBISHI 3105 HITACHI 6107 4110 NORDMENDE 3101 JENSEN 6134 TECHNICS 4121, 4118, 4119 ONKYO 3121 JVC 6140, 6141, 6145, VICTOR 4132, 4133 ORITRON 3124 6148, 6151 YAMAHA 4101, 4102 PANASONIC 3100 KENWOOD 6100, 6101, 6111, PHILIPS 3103, 3116 6145 Laser disks PIONEER 3102 LXI 6136 Brand Code RAITE 3113 MAGNAVOX 6129, 6132 DENON 5114 RCA 3101, 3106 MARANTZ 6129 HITACHI 5100 SABA 3101 MACINTOSH 6121 KENWOOD 5102, 5103 SAMPO 3114 NAKAMICHI 6110 MAGNAVOX 5101 SAMSUNG 3110 ONKYO 6114, 6115 MARANTZ 5114 SHARP 3108 OPTIMUS 6108, 6118, 6120, MITSUBISHI 5114, 5118, 5119 SYLVANIA 3132, 3118 6122 NEC 5114 SMC 3125 PANASONIC 6124, 6125, 6127, PANASONIC 5104, 5105, 5106, SONY 3104, 3126, 3127, 6150 5115 3128 PHILIPS 6129, 6130, 6149 PHILIPS 5111 TECHNICS 3100 PIONEER 6108 PIONEER 5114 THOMSON 3101 QUASAR 6125, 6127, 6124 PROSCAN 5114 TOSHIBA 3103 RCA 6147, 6137, 6138, QUASAR 5104, 5105, 5106, WAVE 3122 6131, 6152 5115 YAMAHA 3100, 3130 SANSUI 6110, 6146, 6113 RCA 5114 ZENITH 3107, 3112 SANYO 6105 SAMSUNG 5112 VIALTA 3131 SCOTT 6110, 6146 SANYO 5114, 5117 FUNAI 3132, 3118 SHARP 6142, 6143 SHARP 5113, 5116 SHERWOOD 6120 SONY 5107, 5108, 5109, Satellite receivers SONY 6128 5110 Brand Code SOUNDE-SIGH 6144 TEAC 5114 DISH NETWORK 2105, 2115, 2116, TEAC 6112, 6116, 6118 TOSHIBA 5114 (Echostar) 2117 TECHNICS 6127, 6124, 6125 YAMAHA 5101 ECHOSTAR 2105 VICTOR 6140, 6141, 6145 EXPRESS VU 2105, 2115 YAMAHA 6102, 6103, 6104 G.E. 2106 G.I.(GENERAL 2108 Receivers INSTRUMENT) Brand Code GRADIENTE 2114 ADMIRAL 4120 HITACHI 2103, 2111, 2112 AIWA 4125, 4126, 4146 HNS(Hughes) 2103 DENON 4134, 4135, 4136, MAGNAVOX 2101, 2102 4143 PANASONIC 2104 FISHER 4104 PHILIPS 2101, 2102, 2118 GARRARD 4113 PRIMESTAR 2108 HARMAN KARDON 4115, 4123, 4145 PROSCAN 2106, 2109, 2110, JENSEN 4129 2113 JVC 4132, 4133, 4140, RCA 2106, 2109, 2110, 4144 2113 KENWOOD 4100, 4108, 4141, SONY 2107 4142, 4147 STAR CHOICE 2103, 2108 MAGNAVOX 4127, 4128 TOSHIBA 2100, 2103, 2119, MARANTZ 4124 2120, 2121, 2122, MCNTOSH 4116 2123, 2124, 2125 MITSUBISHI 4148 UNIDEN 2101, 2102 NAKAMICHI 4106, 4117 ONKYO 4109, 4114 OPTIMUS 4103, 4127, 4131, 4130 PANASONIC 4119, 4118, 4121 PHILIPS 4123 Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 39

4 Menu layout and navigation The illustrations below and on the next page provide a quick overview of your TV’s menu system. Main menu layout To open the main menus (illustrated below), press MENU on the remote control or TV front panel. ➞ TV Guide On Screen® ➞ Opens the TV Guide On Screen® system ➞ Audio Player ➞ Launches the MP3 Audio Player Applications ➞ Picture Viewer ➞ Launches the JPEG Picture Viewer ➞ Digital CC / Audio Selector ➞ Launches the ATSC Digital CC Selector ➞ CableCARD™ ➞ Dynamic list of items provided by inserted CableCARD™. (This option is not available if a CableCARD™ is not inserted.) ➞ Picture Settings ➞ [ Picture Settings edit window ] Video ➞ Advanced Picture Settings ➞ [ Advanced Picture Settings edit window ] ➞ Theater Settings ➞ [ Theater Settings edit window ] ➞ Audio Settings ➞ [ Audio Settings window ] Audio ➞ Advanced Audio Settings ➞ [ Advanced Audio Settings window ] ➞ Audio Setup ➞ [ Audio Setup window ] ➞ Favorite Channels ➞ [ Favorite Channels edit window ] Preferences ➞ Closed Caption Mode ➞ Off / CC1 / CC2 / CC3 / CC4 / T1 / T2 / T3 / T4 ➞ Closed Caption Advanced ➞ [ Advanced Closed Captions window ] ➞ Input Labeling ➞ [ Input Labeling edit window ] ➞ Menu Language ➞ English / Français / Español ➞ Home CH Setup ➞ [ Home Channel Setup window ] ➞ Enable Rating Blocking ➞ Off / On Locks ➞ Edit Rating Limits ➞ [ Edit Rating Limits edit window ] ➞ Channels Block ➞ [ Channels Block edit window ] ➞ Input Lock ➞ Off / Video / Video+ ➞ Front Panel Lock ➞ Off / On ➞ GameTimer™ ➞ Off / 30 Min / 60 Min / 90 Min / 120 Min ➞ New PIN Code ➞ [ New PIN Code entry window ] Setup ➞ Installation ➞ [Opens the Installation menu (see page 41 for details) ] ➞ Sleep Timer ➞ [ Sleep Timer edit window ] ➞ On/Off Timer ➞ [ On/Off Timer window ] Applications ➞ PC Settings ➞ [ PC Settings edit window ] TV Guide On Screen Audio Player ➞ HDMI 1 Audio ➞ Auto / Digital / Analog Picture Viewer Digital CC/Audio Selector ➞ HDMI 2 Audio ➞ Auto / Digital / Analog CableCARD ➞ Slide Show Interval ➞ 2 sec. / 5 sec. / 10 sec. / 15 sec. / 20 sec. ➞ AVHD Skip Time ➞ 1 min. / 3 min. / 5 min. / 15 min. Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit ➞ Gray Level ➞ 1 / 2 / 3 ➞ Quick Restart ➞ Off / On Note: The menu backgrounds may sometimes appear black, depending on the signal being received. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 40

Chapter 4: Menu layout and navigation Setup/Installation menu layout To open the Installation menu (illustrated below), press MENU on the remote control or TV front panel, open the Setup menu, select Installation, and press ENTER. Press MENU. Open the Setup menu, and then open the ➞ Input Configuration ➞ [ Input Configuration window ] Installation sub-menu – – ➔ ➞ Channel Program ➞ ANT1 Terrestrial ➞ ANT2 } ➞ [ Scans for new channels on selected Antenna ] ➞ Channel Add/Delete ➞ [ Channel Add/Delete window ] ➞ Signal Meter ➞ [ Signal Meter window ] ➞ IEEE1394 Devices ➞ [ IEEE1394 Device Management window ] Devices ➞ TheaterNet Devices ➞ [ TheaterNet Setup window ] ➞ Basic Network Setup Network ➞ E-mail Scheduling Setup ➞ Home File Server Setup TV Guide On Screen® Setup ➞ Start ➞ [ Launches the TV Guide On Screen® system setup ] Time and Date ➞ Start Setup ➞ [ Opens the Time and Date Setup window ] System Status ➞ System Information ➞ [ Opens the System Information window ] Navigating the menu system You can use the buttons on the remote TV front panel touchpad Remote control control or TV front touchpad to access and navigate your TV’s on-screen menu system. • Press MENU to open the menu system. • When a menu is open, use the up/down/left/right arrow buttons (yzx •) on the remote control EXIT z y x • MENU (ENTER*) or TV front panel to move in the corresponding direction in the menu. *The MENU button on the TV front panel touchpad MENU • Press ENTER to save your menu functions as the ENTER button when a menu is on-screen. settings or select a highlighted item. (A highlighted menu item appears ENTER in a different color in the menu.) y x • • All menus close automatically if you z do not make a selection within 60 seconds, except the signal meter EXIT menu, which closes automatically after 5 minutes. • To close a menu instantly, press EXIT. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 41

5 TV Guide On Screen® setup Setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system The TV Guide On Screen® system in this TV is a no-fee Configuring the location of your TV interactive program guide that uses the information you enter Screen 1: Select the TV location (USA or Canada), and then during the following setup process to provide you with a press ENTER. channel lineup and program listings for your area. The listings are automatically updated several times a day. Note: • You must first set up your TV according to the applicable connection instructions in Chapter 2. • If you connected a Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD Recorder, you must perform the following TV Guide On Screen® system setup in order to use the Symbio’s full functionality. See pages 26 and 55 for further details about AVHD digital recorders. To set up the TV Guide On Screen® system: Screen 2: Enter the ZIP code (U.S.A.) or postal code (Canada) 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. for your location (use the Number buttons on the remote 2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. control for numbers and the yz buttons for letters), and then press ENTER. Screen 3 appears. Setup Installation Sleep Timer On/Off Timer PC Settings HDMI 1 Audio Auto HDMI 2 Audio Auto Slide Show Interval 2 Sec Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit 3. A new set of Installation menu icons appears TV Guide On Screen Setup Screen 3: Do you have Cable service connected? on-screen (see Start If you select Yes (and press ENTER), screen 4 appears. illustration at right). If you select No (and press ENTER), screen 12 appears. Open the TV Guide On Screen® Setup menu, highlight Start, Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit and press ENTER. 4. The following screen appears. Highlight “Set up TV Guide On Screen® now” and press ENTER to continue. Screen 4: Do you have a Cable box connected? If you select Yes (and press ENTER), screen 5 appears. If you select No (and press ENTER), screen 13 appears. 5. The following screen appears. Press ENTER to continue. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 42

Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen® setup Setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system (continued) Screen 5: Which TV input is your cable box plugged into? Screen 9: To allow the TV Guide On Screen® system to find the If you select ANT 1, screen 6 appears. correct code for your brand of Cable box, tune your Cable If you select Video 1, screen 7 appears. box to channel 02, leave the Cable box and TV ON, and then press ENTER. Screen 10 appears. Screen 6: Select the channel your TV is tuned to when using your cable box, and then press ENTER. Screen 7 appears. Screen 10: The TV Guide On Screen® system will test the code for the brand of Cable box you selected. Do not press any keys on the TV, remote control, or Cable box until the testing process is completed. When testing is completed, screen 11 appears. Screen 7: The on-screen diagram shows the correct way to connect your Cable box to the G-LINK® terminal on the TV. Make sure the G-LINK® cable is installed properly. For additional details, see page 28. Press ENTER to display screen 8. Screen 11: If your Cable box tuned itself to channel 09 after testing, select Yes and press ENTER. If you selected ANT 1 in screen 5, screen 13 appears. If you selected Video 1 in screen 5, screen 12 appears. Screen 8: Highlight your Cable box brand, and then press ENTER to display screen 9. If your Cable box did not tune itself to channel 09 after testing and you want to test the same code again, select “Test this code again” and press ENTER. If you want to test a different code, select No and press ENTER. Screen 10 appears. Note: Many cable boxes require testing more than one code. (Continued on next page) Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 43

Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen® setup Setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system (continued) Screen 12: Do you have an antenna connected? Screen 16: The on-screen diagram shows the correct way to Select either Yes or No, and then press ENTER. Screen 13 connect your VCR to the G-LINK® terminal on the TV. appears. Make sure the G-LINK® cable is installed properly. For Note: If you selected No in screen 3, you must select Yes in additional details, see page 28. this screen to receive a channel lineup and program listings. Press ENTER to display screen 17. Screen 13: Are the settings correct? Screen 17: Select your VCR brand, and then press ENTER. If you select Yes, screen 14 appears. Screen 18 appears. If you select No, screen 1 appears. Screen 18: Turn on your VCR, insert a tape (either blank or Screen 14: Congratulations! You have completed basic previously recorded), and then press PLAY. Screen 19 TV Guide On Screen® system setup. appears. Note: Read the on-screen information regarding the amount of time it may take for listing information to download from the TV Guide On Screen® service. Also see “TV Guide On Screen® Reminder” on page 45. Press ENTER to display screen 15. Screen 19: The TV Guide On Screen® system will test the code for the brand of VCR you selected. Do not press any keys on the TV, remote control, or VCR until the testing process is completed. When testing is completed, screen 20 appears. Screen 15: Is a VCR connected? If you select Yes, screen 16 appears. If you select No, screen 21 appears. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 44

Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen® setup Setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system (continued) Screen 20: If your VCR stopped playing the tape after testing, select Yes and press ENTER. Screen 21 appears. TV Guide On Screen® Reminder If your VCR did not The TV Guide On Screen® system receives program listing stop playing the tape data through your Cable or over-the-air video signal. In after testing and you Did your VCR stop playing? order to receive regular program listing updates, remember want to test the same to do the following: code again, select “Test this code again” 1. Leave the TV in standby mode when it is not in use and press ENTER. by turning it OFF but leaving the power cord plugged in. If you want to test a 2. If you have a Cable box connected, leave it ON. different code, select No and press ENTER. Screen 19 appears. 3. If you have a VCR connected, turn it OFF when not Note: Many VCRs require testing more than one code. in use (but do not unplug the power cord). See pages 15–16 for VCR connection instructions. 4. If you have more than one Cable system in your area, Screen 21: Review the setup information displayed on your TV you may be prompted to select which Cable system’s screen (an example is shown below). program data to download. If so prompted, follow the If the information on on-screen instructions. your TV screen is Note: If the TV power cord is unplugged for an correct for your setup, extended period of time, it may take up to 24 hours with select “Yes, end setup” the TV in standby mode (power cord plugged in and and press ENTER. power OFF) to download the TV Guide On Screen® Screen 22 appears. program schedule. It may take up to 7 days before an If the information is entire program schedule is available. incorrect, select “No, repeat setup process” and press ENTER. Screen 1 appears. Turning off the TV Guide On Screen® Screen 22: Congratulations! You have successfully completed TV Guide On Screen® system setup. automatic display feature Press ENTER to After you set up the TV Guide On Screen® system, the display screen 23. program guide will display automatically (by default) when you turn on the TV. To turn off the automatic program guide: 1. Press TV GUIDE on the remote control to open the TV Guide On Screen® system (if it is not already open). 2. Use the x • buttons to select the Setup menu. 3. Use the yz buttons to select “Change Default Options,” and then press ENTER. Screen 23: This screen provides helpful information on using 4. Use the yz buttons to select “General Defaults,” and your TV Guide On Screen® system. then press ENTER. Press ENTER to exit 5. Set the “Auto Guide” option to Off. the TV Guide 6. Use the yz buttons to select Done, and then press On Screen® setup and ENTER. watch TV. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 45

6 Setting up your TV For menu navigation instructions, see Chapter 4. Selecting the menu language Configuring the antenna input sources for the ANT 1 and ANT 2 You can choose from three different languages (English, French and Spanish) for the on-screen display of menus and messages. terminals Note: The TV Guide On Screen® menus are in English, regardless of the language selected in this menu. To configure the ANT 1 and ANT 2 input sources: To select the menu language: 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. 1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu. 2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of 2. Highlight Menu Language and press •. Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in step 3 below.) 3. Press y or z to select your preferred menu language and press ENTER. Setup Installation Sleep Timer Preferences On/Off Timer Favorite Channels English PC Settings Closed Caption Mode Off Français HDMI 1 Audio Auto Closed Caption Advanced Español HDMI 2 Audio Auto Input Labeling Slide Show Interval 2 Sec Menu Language English Home CH Setup Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit 3. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Input Configuration, 4. Press EXIT to close the Preferences menu. and press ENTER. Note: The Terrestrial menu may not be accessible (items will be “grayed out”) in some instances (for example, if a cable box is connected to the ANT 1 input or if one of the VIDEO modes is the current input during TV Guide On Screen® setup). Terrestrial Input Configuration Channel Program Channel Add/Delete Signal Meter Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit 4. Press x or • to select the input source (Cable or Antenna) for the ANT 1 input on the TV. Note: If a cable box is connected to the ANT 1 input during TV Guide On Screen® setup, the entire Terrestrial menu will not be accessible, including the input source for ANT 1, which will automatically display “Cable Box.” 5. Press z and then x or • to select the input source (Cable or Antenna) for the ANT 2 input on the TV, if applicable. If you have not connected anything to the ANT 2 input, skip this step. Input Configuration Antenna 1 In Cable Antenna 2 In Antenna Cancel Done 6. To save your new settings, highlight Done and press ENTER. To revert to your original settings, highlight Cancel and press ENTER. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 46

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV Programming channels into the TV’s channel memory When you press CHANNEL y or z on the remote control or 4. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Channel Program, TV front panel, your TV will stop only on the channels you and press ENTER. program into the TV’s channel memory. 5. Highlight ANT 1 or Follow the steps below to program channels into the TV’s ANT 2, depending on channel memory. which antenna input Terrestrial Input Configuration you want to program Channel Program Channel Add/Delete channels for, and then Programming channels automatically press ENTER to start Signal Meter Your TV can automatically detect all active channels in your area automatic channel and store them in its memory. After the channels are programming. Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit programmed automatically, you can manually add or erase individual channels. ANT 1 Antenna Scanning channels, please wait ... Note: 52% Abort • You must configure the antenna input sources before programming channels (see page 46). The TV will automatically cycle through all the channels • If the input signal type is set to CABLE for an antenna input, the for the antenna input you selected, and store all active automatic channel programming process erases channels that were previously programmed into the TV’s memory. channels in the channel memory. While the TV is cycling through the channels, the message “Scanning channels, • If the input signal type is set to ANTENNA, the automatic please wait” appears (as shown above). channel programming process does NOT erase channels that were previously programmed into the TV’s memory, but adds 6. To cancel channel programming, either press EXIT or newly found channels to the existing set of programmed highlight Abort in the on-screen display and press ENTER. channels. To remove a channel from the memory, you must When channel programming is done, press CHANNEL manually delete it (see next page). y or z to view the programmed channels. • To tune the TV to a channel not programmed in the channel memory, you must use the Channel Number buttons on the remote control. • Programming channels for an antenna input configured for CABLE will take substantially longer than for an antenna input configured for ANTENNA. This is normal; however, once channel programming is completed, you should not have to Channel repeat the programming process again unless your Cable TV Numbers service lineup changes significantly. • If you have a CableCARD™ inserted (page 14), channel programming for ANT 1 is disabled because the CableCARD™ automatically loads the Cable channel list into the TV’s channel memory. To program channels automatically: 1. Make sure you have configured the antenna input sources. See page 46 for details. 2. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. CHANNEL yz 3. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of Installation menu icons will appear on-screen). TV front panel touchpad Setup Installation Sleep Timer On/Off Timer PC Settings HDMI 1 Audio Auto HDMI 2 Audio Auto Slide Show Interval 2 Sec CHANNEL z / y MENU Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit (ENTER) Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 47

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV Programming channels into the TV’s channel memory (continued) Manually adding and deleting channels in To add a channel to the channel memory: the channel memory Highlight the unchecked box next to the channel number you want to add, and then press ENTER to check the box. After automatically programming channels into the channel memory, you can manually add or delete individual channels. To manually add digital subchannels on a physical channel: Use the Channel Numbers and the Dash (–/100) on the To add or delete channels in the channel memory: remote control to enter the channel number (for example, 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. 56–1). 2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of If the channel is found, the number will be added to the list Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in and the box will be checked. step 3). If the channel is not found, a message will appear. To remove a channel from the channel memory: Setup Highlight the checked box next to the channel number you Installation Sleep Timer want to remove, and then press ENTER to uncheck the On/Off Timer PC Settings box. HDMI 1 Audio Auto HDMI 2 Audio Auto To save your new settings: Slide Show Interval 2 Sec Highlight Done and press ENTER. Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit To revert to your original settings: 3. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Channel Add/Delete, Highlight Cancel and press ENTER before saving. and then press ENTER. To remove all channels from the channel memory: Highlight Reset and press ENTER, and then highlight Terrestrial Done and press ENTER. Input Configuration Channel Program Note: Channel Add/Delete Signal Meter • This action applies to the current antenna input only. To delete/add channels on the other input, highlight the input you want (ANT1, ANT 2, or Cable Box) and press ENTER. Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit • This action cannot be cancelled unless you highlight Cancel and press ENTER before saving your changes. 4. The illustration below left shows channels programmed for Channel Add/Delete ANT 1 the ANT 1 antenna input. To view the list of channels 2 Analog ANT 1 programmed for the ANT 2 or Cable box antenna input, 2-1 Digital ANT 2 press the y z buttons to highlight either “ANT 2” or 2-2 3 Digital Analog Cable Box “Cable Box” and press ENTER. 4 Analog 5 Digital Note: “Cable Box” will appear only if you connected a cable 6 Analog box to your TV. 7 Analog Reset 7-1 Digital Cancel Channel Add/Delete ANT 1 Channel Add/Delete Cable Box 8 Analog Done 2 Analog ANT 1 1 Analog ANT 1 2-1 Digital ANT 2 2 Analog ANT 2 2-2 Digital Cable Box 3 Analog Cable Box 3 Analog 4 Analog 4 Analog 5 Analog 5 Analog 6 Analog 6 Analog 7 Analog 7 Analog Reset 8 Analog Reset 7-1 Digital Cancel 9 Analog Cancel 8 Analog Done 10 Analog Done Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 48

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV Programming your favorite channels You can program up to 27 channels as favorite channels into To clear your favorite channel lists: three Favorite Channel sets (nine channels from the ANT 1 1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu. input, nine from the ANT 2 input, and nine from the Cable 2. Highlight Favorite Channels and press ENTER. box input). You can then scan through your favorite channels only, skipping other channels you do not normally watch. 3. Highlight Edit and press Edit Favorite Channels ANT 2 ENTER. 2 2-1 To add and delete channels in the Favorite Channels sets: 4. Highlight Reset and press 2-2 4-1 1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu. ENTER. 5 17 - 1 2. Highlight Favorite Channels and press ENTER. 5. Highlight Done and press 17 - 2 28 - 1 Reset 3. Use the yz buttons to select either ANT 1, ANT 2, or ENTER. 28 - 2 Cancel Cable Box and press ENTER. 28 - 3 Done 4. Highlight Edit and press ENTER. To tune your favorite channels for the current ANT input: Note: “Cable Box” will appear only if you connected a cable box to your TV. Press FAV CH yz. To tune your favorite channels using the favorite Preferences Favorite Channels ANT 1 channel list: Favorite Channels ANT 1 Closed Caption Mode Closed Caption Advanced Off Empty Empty Empty ANT 2 1. Press 100 to display the favorite channel list. 1 CH 4-1 Cable Box 2 CH 4-2 Input Labeling Menu Language English Empty Empty Empty 2. Press the corresponding number button (1–9) 3 CH 9 Home CH Setup 4 CH 10 Empty Empty Empty Edit to select your desired channel. 5 CH 12 Done Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Note: To tune your favorite channels for another 6 CH 17 7 CH 19 input, press INPUT to select the other input. 8 --- To add a channel to the selected Favorite Channel set: To quickly scan through your favorite 9 --- Use the yz buttons to highlight an unchecked box next to channels in a nine picture multi-window (for the current a channel you want to set as a favorite, and then press ANT input): ENTER to check the box. Press FAV SCAN. See page 83 for details. Edit Favorite Channels ANT 1 To delete the channel from the 2 3 Note: selected Favorite Channel set: 4 • To tune to a channel from the FAV SCAN mode, highlight a 5 Only 9 favorite channels are allowed, Highlight a checked box and please 6 deselect other channels first. window and press ENTER. 7 press ENTER to uncheck it. 8 OK • To scan your favorite channels for another input, press INPUT to Reset 9 Note: If you try to add more 10 Cancel select the other input. than nine favorite channels per 11 Done input, an error message will appear. You will need to delete (uncheck) a channel before you can add another. Channel Numbers When done, highlight Done and press ENTER. 100 To program favorite channels for another input: Either... Highlight ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box, which y x • will change the favorite channel settings in the z selected input. (This will not change the TV’s current input.) Or... Press INPUT to select ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box and then repeat steps 1–4, above. FAV CH yz Favorite Channels ANT 2 ANT 1 FAV SCAN CH 6 Empty Empty ANT 2 Cable Box Empty Empty Empty Edit Empty Empty Empty Done Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 49

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV Setting up and using TheaterNet™ on-screen device control The TheaterNet feature allows you to control many brands of 5. The TheaterNet Setup menu opens. IEEE1394 and/or infrared remote-controlled A/V devices TheaterNet Setup through your TV using on-screen control icons and the TV’s Input Video 1 Select device remote control. Type Cable type, brand, and IR code Brand General Instrum... from owners Note: IR List 0000 manual. IR Code 0 0 0 0 Test • Although the TheaterNet on-screen device control feature includes Reset Done codes for many devices, it may not include codes for some or all of the features on certain devices you wish to control. If you are unable to program the TheaterNet feature to operate your device Using the x • buttons, select the Input the device is or some of the features on that device, use the device’s remote connected to. control or the controls on the device. Note: When the input is changed, all unsaved settings will be • For IR pass-through device control information, see “Connecting a lost. device to the TheaterNet OUT infrared terminal” on page 22. 6. Press z and then x • to select the device Type. 7. Press z and then x • to select the device Brand. Setting up TheaterNet Note: When selecting a new brand, the IR code will be set to 0. All device types except IEEE1394 require the following setup 8. Press z and then x • to select the device’s IR List. process before you can control them using the TheaterNet 9. If the desired IR code is found, skip to step 10. on-screen icons. If the desired IR code is not in the list, press z and use the All compatible IEEE1394 devices are automatically recognized Channel Number buttons to enter the device IR code. by the TheaterNet feature and do not require setup. Note: You can find the IR code for your device in the Note: See page 25 for details about the IEEE1394 ports. If your on-screen list or in the TheaterNet device code table on IEEE1394 device is not recognized through the IEEE1394 port or pages 52–54. through the TheaterNet feature, it may be possible to set it up for IR pass-through control as an infrared device (see page 22). 10. Highlight Test and press ENTER to test whether the device responds to the code. If the device does not respond to the To set up TheaterNet device control: code, repeat steps 8 and 9 using another code for the same 1. Make sure you have properly connected your infrared device. remote-controlled device(s). See pages 22 and 25 for details. When done, highlight Done and press ENTER or choose 2. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. a different Input for which to set up TheaterNet device control. 3. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. To remove a device from TheaterNet: Setup 1. Follow steps 1–5 above. Installation 2. Highlight Reset and press ENTER. Sleep Timer On/Off Timer PC Settings HDMI 1 Audio Auto HDMI 2 Audio Auto Slide Show Interval 2 Sec Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit 4. A new set of Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown below. Open the Devices menu, highlight TheaterNet Devices, and then press ENTER. Devices IEEE1394 Devices TheaterNet Devices Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 50

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV Setting up and using TheaterNet™ on-screen device control (continued) Using the TheaterNet control icons 1. Set up your infrared devices in TheaterNet, if you have not The following are examples of the TheaterNet on-screen already done so (see page 50). control icons for various devices. Note: IEEE1394 devices do not need to be set up in TheaterNet because they appear automatically in the Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD Recorder control* TheaterNet menu. 2. Press DEVICE on the remote control to display the device control selection screen. * If you connected a Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD Recorder, you must set up the TV Guide On Screen® system in order to use the Symbio’s full functionality. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system. See pages 26 and 55 for further details about AVHD digital recorders. TheaterNet DEVICE 0 Video 2 1 Video 3 CTRL Toshiba Toshiba y 2 ColorStream HD1 3 ColorStream HD2 x • Toshiba Toshiba z ENTER EXIT Toshiba 3. Using the yzx • buttons, highlight the device you want to control and press ENTER. TheaterNet Toshiba 0 Video 2 1 Video 3 Toshiba Toshiba 2 ColorStream HD1 3 ColorStream HD2 CH Toshiba Toshiba 4. The input automatically changes to the input for the selected device, and the device’s control icons display on-screen. Toshiba ColorStream HD1 ENTER TOP MENU SELECT EXIT Highlight the icon for the function you want to control and press ENTER. To select the device’s control icons directly: Press CTRL. To close the on-screen control icons: Press EXIT. To view another source: Press DEVICE and select the input source you want to view. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 51

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV TheaterNet™ IR device codes Amplifiers Cable boxes (cont.) CD players (cont.) Brand Code Brand Code Brand Code Aiwa 0406 RadioShack 0015 Proton 0157 Bose 0674 Regal 0020, 0273, 0279 QED 0157 Carver 0269 Rembrandt 0011 Quasar 0029 Curtis Mathes 0300 Runco 0000 RCA 1062, 0032, 0053, Denon 0160 Samsung 0144 0179, 0305, 0468, GE 0078 Scientific Atlanta 0877, 0008, 0017, 0764 Harman/Kardon 0892 0477, 1877 Realistic 0179, 0180, 0420 JVC 0331 Signal 0015 Rotel 0157, 0420 Left Coast 0892 Signature 0011 SAE 0157 Linn 0269 Sony 1006 Sansui 0157, 0305 Luxman 0165 Starcom 0003, 0015 Sanyo 0179 Magnavox 0269 Stargate 0015 Scott 0305 Marantz 0892, 0321, 0269 Starquest 0015 Sears 0305 NEC 0264 Supercable 0276 Sharp 0861, 0037, 0180 Nakamichi 0321 Tocom 0012 Sherwood 1067, 0180 Optimus 0395, 0300 Torx 0003 Sonic Frontiers 0157 Panasonic 0308, 0521 Toshiba 0000 Sony 0490, 0000, 0100, Parasound 0246 Tusa 0015 0185, 0604, 1364 Philips 0892, 0269 United Artists 0007 Soundesign 0145 Pioneer 0013, 0300 Zenith 0000, 0525, 0899 TDK 1208 Polk Audio 0892, 0269 Tascam 0420 RCA 0300 CD players Teac 0174, 0180, 0393, Realistic 0395 Brand Code 0420 Sansui 0321 Aiwa 0157, 0124 Technics 0029, 0303 Shure 0264 Burmester 0420 Victor 0072 Sony 0689, 0220 California Audio Labs 0029, 0303 Wards 0157, 0053 Soundesign 0078, 0211 Carver 0157, 0179, 0437 Yamaha 0888, 0036, 0187, Technics 0308, 0521 Classic 1297 1292 Victor 0331 DKK 0000 Yorx 0461 Wards 0078, 0013, 0211 DMX Electronics 0157 Yamaha 0354, 0133 Denon 0873, 0003 Laser disk players Emerson 0305 Brand Code Fisher 0174, 0179, 1325 Aiwa 0203 Cable boxes GPX 1296 Carver 0064, 0194, 0323 Brand Code Garrard 0393, 0420 Denon 0059, 0172 ABC 0003, 0008, 0014, Genexxa 0032, 0305 Disco Vision 0023 0007, 0011, 0017 Harman/Kardon 0157, 0173 Funai 0203 Americast 0899 Hitachi 0032 Harman/Kardon 0194 Bell & Howell 0014 JVC 0072, 1294 Hitachi 0023 Bell South 0899 KLH 1318, 1372, 1373 Magnavox 0194, 0217 Contec 0019 Kenwood 0681, 0826, 0626, Marantz 0064, 0194 Director 0476 0028, 0037, 0190 Mitsubishi 0059 Everquest 0015 Koss 1317 NAD 0059 Gemini 0015 Krell 0157 Optimus 0059 General Instrument 0476, 0003, 0276, LXI 0305 Panasonic 0204 0011, 0810 Linn 0157 Philips 0064, 0194 GoldStar 0144 MCS 0029 Pioneer 0059, 0023 Hamlin 0009, 0020, 0273 MTC 0420 Polk Audio 0194 Hitachi 0011 Magnavox 0157, 0305 Quasar 0204 Hytex 0007 Marantz 0626, 0029, 0157, Realistic 0203 Jasco 0015 0180 Samsung 0323 Jerrold 0476, 0003, 0276, Miro 0000 Sega 0023 0012, 0014, 0015, Mission 0157 Sony 0193, 0201 0011, 0810 NSM 0157 Technics 0204 Memorex 0000 Nikko 0174 Theta Digital 0194 Motorola 0476, 1106, 0276, Onkyo 0868, 0101 Yamaha 0217 0810 Optimus 1063, 0000, 0032, Oak 0019, 0007 0037, 0145, 0179, Miscellaneous audio devices Pace 0237 0305, 0420, 0437, Brand Code Panasonic 0000, 0107 0468 Aiwa 0010, 0159, 0404 Paragon 0000 Panasonic 0029, 0303 Fisher 0052 Philips 0305, 0317 Parasound 0420 JVC 0073 Pioneer 0877, 0144, 0533, Philips 0626, 0157 Jerrold 0520, 0459 1877 Pioneer 1063, 1062, 0032, Scientific Atlanta 0460 Pulsar 0000 0305, 0468 Sony 0010, 0159, 0576 Quasar 0000 Polk Audio 0157 Starcom 0459 Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 52

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV TheaterNet™ IR device codes (continued) Video accessory (HDTV decoder) Receivers (cont.) VCRs Brand Code Brand Code Brand Code Panasonic 1120 Proscan 1254 Admiral 0048, 0209 Pioneer 1010 Quasar 0039 Adventura 0000 Princeton 0113, 0295 RCA 1023, 1254, 0080, Aiko 0278 Samsung 1190 0531, 1390, 1609 Aiwa 0037, 0000 Sensory Science 1126 Realistic 0181, 0195 Akai 0041 Sharp 1010 Samsung 1295 America Action 0278 Sansui 1089, 0189 American High 0035 Sanyo 0801, 1251 Asha 0240 Receivers Sharp 0186, 1286 Audiovox 0037, 0278 Brand Code Sherwood 0491, 0502, 1653 Beaumark 0240 ADC 0531 Sony 1058, 1258, 1158, Bell & Howell 0104 Aiwa 1089, 1405, 0121, 0158, 0474, 1367, Broksonic 0184, 0121, 0209, 0158, 0189, 0405, 1558, 1658,1758 0002, 0479, 1479 1388, 1641 Soundesign 0670 CCE 0072, 0278 Alco 1390 Stereophonics 1023 Calix 0037 Anam 1609 Sunfire 1313 Canon 0035 Apex Digital 1257 Teac 0463 Carver 0081 Arcam 1120 Technics 1308, 1309, 1518, Cineral 0278 Audiotronic 1189 0039, 0309 Citizen 0037, 0278, 1278 Audiovox 1390 Thorens 1189 Colt 0072 Bose 1229 Venturer 1390 Craig 0037, 0047, 0240, Cambridge Soundworks 1370 Victor 0074 0072 Capetronic 0531 Wards 0014, 0080, 0158, Curtis Mathes 0060, 0035, 0162, Carver 1089, 1189, 0042, 0189 0041, 0760, 1035 0189 Yamaha 0176, 0186, 1176 Cybernex 0240 Casio 0195 Yorx 0195 Daewoo 0045, 0278, 1278 Clarinette 0195 Zenith 0857 Denon 0042 Compaq 1136 Dynatech 0000 Curtis Mathes 0080 Electrohome 0037 Daewoo 1250 Satellite receivers Electrophonic 0037 Denon 1104, 1160, 0004, Brand Code Emerex 0032 1360 AlphaStar 0772 Emerson 0037, 0184, 0000, Fisher 0042, 1801 Chaparral 0216 0121, 0043, 0209, Garrard 0463 Crossdigital 1109 0002, 0278, 0479, Harman/Kardon 0110, 0189, 0891 DishPro 1005, 0775 1278, 1479 Hewlett Packard 1181 Echostar 1005, 0775 Fisher 0047, 0104 JBL 0110, 1306 Expressvu 0775 Fuji 0035, 0033 JVC 0074, 1374 GE 0566 Funai 0000 KLH 1390 GOI 0775 GE 0060, 0035, 0240, Kenwood 1313, 1027, 1570, General Instrument 0869 0760, 0807, 1035, 1569, 0027, 0042, HTS 0775 1060 0186 Hitachi 0819 Garrard 0000 Koss 1366 Hughes Network Systems 1142, 0749, 1749 Go Video 0432 LXI 0181 JVC 0775 GoldStar 0037, 0038, 1237 Lasonic 1798 Magnavox 0724, 0722 Gradiente 0000 Linn 0189 Memorex 0724 HI-Q 0047 Lloyd’s 0195 Mitsubishi 0749 Harley Davidson 0000 MCS 0039 Motorola 0869 Harman/Kardon 0081, 0038 Magnavox 1089, 1189, 0189, Next Level 0869 Harwood 0072 0195, 0391, 0531 Panasonic 0247, 0701 Headquarter 0046 Marantz 1089, 1189, 0039, Paysat 0724 Hitachi 0000, 0042, 0041 0189 Philips 1142, 0749, 0724, Hughes Network Systems 0042 Modulaire 0195 1076, 0722, 1749 JVC 0067, 0041 Musicmagic 1089 Proscan 0392 Jensen 0041 Nakamichi 0097 RCA 0392, 0566, 0855, KEC 0037, 0278 Onkyo 0135, 0842, 1298 0143 KLH 0072 Optimus 1023, 0042, 0080, RadioShack 0869 Keen 0693 0181, 0186, 0531, SKY 0856 Kenwood 0067, 0041, 0038 0670, 0738, 0801 Samsung 1109 Kodak 0035, 0037 Panasonic 1518, 0039, 0309, Sony 0639 LXI 0037 0367 Star Choice 0869 Lloyd’s 0000 Penney 0195 Toshiba 0749, 0790, 1052, Logik 0072 Philips 1089, 1189, 1269, 1053, 1054, 1285, MEI 0035 0189, 0391, 1120 1286, 1287, 1289, MGA 0240, 0043 Pioneer 1023, 0014, 0080, 1749 MGN Technology 0240 0150, 0244, 0531, Uniden 0724, 0722 MTC 0240, 0000 0630, 1384 Zenith 0856, 1856 Magnasonic 1278 Polk Audio 0189 Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 53

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV TheaterNet™ IR device codes (continued) VCRs (cont.) VCRs (cont.) DVD players (cont.) Brand Code Brand Code Brand Code Magnavox 0035, 0039, 0081, Scott 0184, 0045, 0121, Hitachi 0573, 0664 0000, 0149, 0563, 0043 Hiteker 0672 1781 Sears 0035, 0037, 0047, JBL 0702 Magnin 0240 0000, 0042, 0104, JVC 0558, 0623, 0867 Marantz 0035, 0081 0046, 1237 KLH 0717 Marta 0037 Semp 0045 Kenwood 0490, 0534, 0682, Matsushita 0035, 0162, 0454 Sharp 0048, 0807, 0848 0737 Memorex 0035, 0162, 0037, Shintom 0072 Konka 0711, 0719, 0720, 0048, 0039, 0047, Shogun 0240 0721 0240, 0000, 0104, Singer 0072 Koss 0651 0209, 0046, 0454, Sonic Blue 0614, 0616 Lasonic 0798 0479, 1037, 1162, Sony 0035, 0032, 0000, Magnavox 0503, 0675 1237, 1262 0033, 0636, 1032, Malata 0782 Minolta 0042 1232 Marantz 0539 Mitsubishi 0067, 0043, 0807 Sylvania 0035, 0081, 0000, Microsoft 0522 Motorola 0035, 0048 0043, 1781 Mintek 0717 Multitech 0000, 0072 Symphonic 0000 Mitsubishi 0521 NEC 0104, 0067, 0041, TMK 0240 Nesa 0717 0038 Tatung 0041 Next Base 0826 Nikko 0037 Teac 0000, 0041 Norcent 0872 Noblex 0240 Technics 0035, 0162 Onkyo 0503, 0627 Olympus 0035 Teknika 0035, 0037, 0000 Oritron 0651 Optimus 1062, 0162, 0037, Thomas 0000 Panasonic 0490, 0632, 1362, 0048, 0104, 0432, Tivo 0618, 0636 1462, 1490 0454, 1048, 1162, Toshiba 0045, 0043, 0845 Philips 0503, 0539, 0646, 1262 Totevision 0037, 0240 0854 Orion 0184, 0209, 0002, Unitech 0240 Pioneer 0525, 0571, 0632 0479, 1479 Vector 0045 Polk Audio 0539 Panasonic 1062, 0035, 0162, Vector Research 0038 Princeton 0674 0225, 0454, 0616, Video Concepts 0045 Proscan 0522 1035, 1162, 1262 Videomagic 0037 RCA 0522, 0571, 0717, Penney 0035, 0037, 0240, Videosonic 0240 0822 0042, 0038, 1035, Villain 0000 Rotel 0623 1237 Wards 0060, 0035, 0048, Rowa 0823 Pentax 0042 0047, 0081, 0240, Sampo 0698 Philco 0035, 0209, 0479 0000, 0042, 0072, Samsung 0573, 0820 Philips 0035, 0081, 0618, 0149, 0760 Sansui 0695 1081, 1181 White Westinghouse 0209, 0072, 1278 Sanyo 0670 Pilot 0037 XR-1000 0035, 0000, 0072 Sharp 0630 Pioneer 0067 Yamaha 0038 Sherwood 0633 Polk Audio 0081 Zenith 0039, 0000, 0209, Shinsonic 0533 Profitronic 0240 0033, 0479, 1479 Sony 0533, 0864, 1533 Proscan 0060, 0760, 1060 Sylvania 0675, 0821 Protec 0072 Technics 0490 Pulsar 0039 DVD players Techwood 0692 Quarter 0046 Brand Code Theta Digital 0571 Quartz 0046 Toshiba 0503, 0695, 1045 Aiwa 0641 Quasar 0035, 0162, 0454, Tredex 0800 Apex Digital 0672, 0717, 0755, 1035, 1162 Urban Concepts 0503 0794, 0796, 0797, RCA 0060, 0240, 0042, XBox 0522 0830, 0856, 1100 0149, 0760, 0807, Audiologic 0736 1035, 1060 B&K 0655, 0662 RadioShack 0000, 1037 Blue Parade 0571 Radix 0037 Broksonic 0695 Randex 0037 DVD2000 0521 Realistic 0035, 0037, 0048, Daewoo 0784 0047, 0000, 0104, Denon 0490, 0634 0046 Emerson 0591 ReplayTV 0614, 0616 Enterprise 0591 Runco 0039 Fisher 0670 STS 0042 GE 0522, 0717 Samsung 0240, 0045 GPX 0699, 0769 Sanky 0048, 0039 Go Video 0715 Sansui 0000, 0067, 0209, Gradiente 0651 0041, 0479, 1479 Greenhill 0717 Sanyo 0047, 0240, 0104, Harman/Kardon 0582, 0702 0046 Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 54

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV Setting the AVHD device skip time Setting the time and date When you connect an external AVHD (audio/video hard drive) Note: If you already set up the TV Guide On Screen® system, the device—such as the Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD Recorder—to time and date were set automatically and you can skip this step. one of the TV’s IEEE1394 ports, you can use the AVHD device To set the time and date: skip time feature to set the number of minutes the device will skip forward or backward when you press the SKIP buttons. 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. Note: 2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of • This TV will work best with the Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD Recorder* Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in for recording high definition and standard definition material from step 3 below.) either tuner and for controlling live TV (pause/rewind/etc.). When the 3. Open the Time And Date menu, highlight Start Setup, and Symbio AVHD Recorder is connected to the TV, the remote control press ENTER. keys (LIVE, STOP, REW, PAUSE, PLAY, etc.) are automatically activated to allow pausing of live TV. • When you connect an AVHD (or D-VHS) device, the TV Guide Time And Date Start Setup On Screen® system is automatically configured to allow recording. See page 26 for device connection information. See Chapters 5 and 7 for details about setting up and using the TV Guide On screen® system. To set the AVHD device skip time: Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. If you have not set up the TV Guide On Screen® system, the Setup 2. Highlight AVHD Skip Sleep Timer 1 min following screen will appear. To set the time, highlight Time and press •. On/Off Timer 3 min TV Guide On Screen® and press ENTER. The TV Guide PC Settings 5 min Analog 3. Press y or z to select HDMI 1 Audio Auto Auto 15 min On Screen® setup sequence will start, and the time and date the AVHD skip time HDMI 2 Audio Slide Show Interval Auto Auto 2 Sec will be set automatically. (1, 3, 5, or 15 minutes) AVHD Skip Time 15 min Time And Date and press ENTER. Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Your TV Guide On Screen system can provide accurate time and date information. It is recommended you set up TV Guide On Screen *To enjoy the full benefits of your Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD Recorder, you first and use it to obtain the time and date. must first set up the TV Guide On Screen® system (see Chapter 5). Full Manual TV Guide On Screen Cancel Symbio™ AVHD Recorder benefits, including Intelligent One Touch recording, will not be available unless the TV Guide On Screen® system is fully operational. However, even if the TV Guide On Screen® system is not If you have already set up the TV Guide On Screen® system, fully operational, manual recording is available as long as the TV Guide or if you have not set up the time, the Time and Date setting On Screen® system has acquired the necessary date and time data. If you screen will appear and you will need to manually set the time experience any issues with your Symbio AVHD Recorder, please contact and date. Toshiba Consumer Solutions by calling (800) 631-3811 or visiting Time And Date http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp. Date (MM/DD/YY) 0 6/3 0/0 5 Time (HH:MM) 1 1 : 1 1 AM Setting the HDMI™ audio mode Cancel Done To set the HDMI audio mode: 1. Press MENU and open Note: the Setup menu. • If you highlight TV Guide On Screen® (above) to set the time Setup 2. Highlight HDMI 1 (or Installation Auto and date through the TV Guide On Screen® system and a 2) Audio and press •. Sleep Timer On/Off Timer Digital Analog power outage occurs, the time and date will be updated 3. Press z or y to select PC Settings Auto automatically when the power is restored. HDMI 1 Audio Auto the HDMI audio mode HDMI 2 Audio Auto • If you highlight Manual (above) to set the time and date Slide Show Interval 2 Sec (Auto, Digital, or manually and a power outage occurs, you will lose the time Analog) and press Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit and date settings when the power is restored. ENTER. (Auto is the • If you manually set the time and date and then perform recommended mode). See “Connecting an HDMI or DVI TV Guide On Screen® setup, the manual time and date settings device to the HDMI input” on page 21. will be overridden by the TV Guide On Screen® settings. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 55

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV Viewing the CableCARD™ menu Setting the Quick Restart™ feature A CableCARD™ enables you to view encrypted digital channels. With the Quick Restart™ feature set to ON, the TV will stay in See page 14 for connection and subscription information. Shutdown mode for several minutes after the TV is turned off After the CableCARD™ is inserted, a CableCARD™ option (see Notes below). appears in the Applications menu, with informational screens If the TV is turned on from Shutdown mode, the full picture provided by your digital CableCARD™ service (see illustrations appears immediately. below). To set the Quick Restart™ feature: CableCard Connected -- Acquiring channel information. 1. Press MENU, and then press x or • until the Setup menu appears. CableCard services will only operate with cable signal connected to Antenna 1. 2. Highlight Quick Restart and press •. 3. Press z or y to select either On or Off. To view the CableCARD™ menu: 1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu. Setup 2. Highlight CableCARD™ and press •. PC Settings HDMI 1 Audio Auto Auto Off On 3. Press z or y to select one of the side menu items and then HDMI 2 Audio Slide Show Interval Auto Auto 2 Sec press ENTER to display the information. AVHD Skip Time 15 min Gray Level 1 Quick Restart On Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Applications TV Guide On Screen IP Service Audio Player Conditional Access Note: Picture Viewer CableCARD(tm) Status Digital CC/Audio Selector Network Setup If Quick Restart is set to OFF and you turn off the TV, it can take CableCARD CableCARD(tm) Pairing several seconds for the picture to appear when you turn on the TV again. See “Important notice about hot lamp restart,” below. Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit If Quick Restart is set to ON and you turn off the TV, the following will occur for a few minutes: Note: The CableCARD™ menu is for informational purposes • the screen (lamp) will light dimly; and only and has no user-adjustable options. • the fans will continue to run. This is a function of the Quick Restart Shutdown mode and is not a TV malfunction. If you do not prefer this, set the Quick Restart feature to OFF. When the Quick Restart feature is set to OFF, if you repeatedly turn the TV on and off in a short period of time, the useful service life of the lamp may be shorter than the average useful service life. See page 129. IMPORTANT NOTICE ABOUT “HOT LAMP RESTART” When the TV has been powered on long enough for the lamp unit to get hot, it may take several minutes for the picture to appear on-screen in the following situations: • when the Quick Restart™ feature is set to OFF and you turn the TV off and then on again within a few minutes; or • if the TV is on when a short-term power failure, power surge, or other similar power failure occurs, such that the TV loses and regains power within a few minutes. This is a property of DLP lamp technology and is NOT a sign of malfunction. If this occurs, the green LED on the TV front panel will blink (and the red LED will be lit solid) until the TV is finished restarting the lamp and the normal picture appears. If both LEDs are blinking, you will need to turn the TV off and then on again to restart the lamp. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 56

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV Viewing the digital signal meter Viewing the system status You can view the digital signal meter for the ANT 1 and ANT 2 To view the system status: digital TV input sources only. 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. To view the digital signal meter: 2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. A new set of 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown 2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. below right. Setup System Status Setup Installation System Infomation Sleep Timer Installation On/Off Timer Sleep Timer PC Settings On/Off Timer HDMI 1 Audio Auto PC Settings HDMI 2 Audio Auto HDMI 1 Audio Auto Slide Show Interval 2 Sec HDMI 2 Audio Auto Slide Show Interval 2 Sec Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit 3. Open the System Status menu, highlight System Information, and then press ENTER. 3. A new set of Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown below. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight 4. Press x • to scroll through the menu bar to check the Signal Meter, and press ENTER. Product Information and Software Version. System Information System Information Product Information Software Version Brand: Toshiba 0.3.0 Terrestrial Model: 52HMX95 Mar 9 2005 - 12:37:10 Input Configuration IEEE1394 GUID: 00003914-28343803 FW:0.12 Channel program Sub:47 Channel Add/Delete Signal Meter Done Done Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit To close the screen and return to the Installation menu: Highlight Done and press ENTER. 4. Press yzx • to select the antenna input and digital To return to normal viewing: channel whose signal you want to check. Press EXIT. Note: The physical digital channel number listed in the Signal Meter screen may not correspond to a virtual TV channel Restore Factory Defaults number. Contact your local broadcasters to obtain the RF channel numbers for your local digital stations. To restore all settings and channels to their factory default values: Signal Meter Signal Locked 1. Follow steps 1–3 above. 0 Peak 0 2. Press x • to scroll through the menu bar to select Factory Antenna 1 Defaults. Physical Digital Channel 13 Virtual Digital Channel N/A 3. Enter your PIN code (or 0000 if no PIN code has been set). Done 4. Highlight Yes and press ENTER. The TV will turn off automatically after a few seconds. After the TV turns off, To close the screen and return to the Terrestrial menu: unplug the TV power cord and then plug it in again to Highlight Done and press ENTER. complete the restore process. System Information To return to normal viewing: Press YES to confirm. After the TV Press EXIT. turns off, unplug it and plug it dack in to complete the reset. Yes No To cancel the reset: Highlight No and press ENTER. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 57

7 Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide The TV Guide On Screen® system is a free, interactive, • Direct tuning—Directly tune the TV to a current program on-screen program guide built in to your Toshiba TV that lists you want to watch by selecting it in the program guide. schedules and information for TV programs in your area. • Reminders—Schedule show reminders that will either display Note: Over-the-air or cable access to stations carrying TV Guide an on-screen notification banner or automatically tune the TV On Screen® data is required for the TV Guide On Screen® system to to the channel of the show for which you set the reminder. operate. The TV Guide On Screen® system does not work with satellite • Recording—Easily schedule recording of one or more programming. Toshiba does not provide the TV Guide On Screen® data; rather, such data is provided by a third party, which is responsible for its programs. accuracy and availability. Additionally, occasional compatibility issues may Note: A VCR or IEEE1394 recording device is required for recording. exist between the TV Guide On Screen® system contained in your TV and It is recommended that you connect your devices according to the the data provided by the third party. If you experience any performance instructions in Chapter 2. issues with your TV Guide On Screen® system, please contact Toshiba • Search—Search for shows by category, by keyword, or Consumer Solutions by calling (800) 631-3811 or visiting alphabetically. http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp. • On-screen help—The TV Guide On Screen® system contains The TV Guide On Screen® system includes the following on-screen feature definitions and navigation instructions. features: • Streamlined on-screen assisted setup—Quickly and easily set To open the TV Guide On Screen® system: up your TV Guide On Screen® system using the on-screen • While watching TV, press prompts (see “Setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system” the TV GUIDE button Applications below). on the remote control; TV Guide On Screen • Program listings and INFO windows—Scroll through eight —or— Audio Player Picture Viewer days of TV listings and view program information such as • Press MENU, open the Digital CC/Audio Selector CableCARD rating, stereo, HDTV, new episode. Applications menu, • Watch TV and display TV Guide On Screen® information highlight TV Guide simultaneously. On Screen®, and press Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit ENTER. • Channel lineup customization—Customize your channel lineup so your favorite stations are listed first. Note: After setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system, the program guide opens automatically by default when you turn on the TV. To turn off this feature, see page 45. Setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system Follow these instructions to set up the TV Guide On Screen® 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. system so it can receive current program data for your area. Note: If you move the TV to a different ZIP/postal code, you must 2. Highlight Installation and then press ENTER to open the perform the TV Guide On Screen® Setup process to reconfigure your Installation menus. (A new set of menu icons will appear TV Guide On Screen® system for the new location on-screen, as shown in step 3 below.) If you have not already connected your antenna, cable box, 3. Open the TV Guide On Screen® Setup menu, highlight and/or recording device, see Chapter 2 for connection Start, and then press ENTER. instructions. Note: You must connect a VCR or an IEEE1394 compatible Setup TV Guide On Screen Setup recording device to use the TV Guide On Screen® system’s Installation Start Sleep Timer one-touch recording feature. It is recommended that you On/Off Timer PC Settings connect your devices according to the connection instructions HDMI 1 Audio Auto in Chapter 2. HDMI 2 Audio Slide Show Interval Auto 2 Sec Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and 4. Go to Chapter 5 for instructions on completing the setup. other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. Read this chapter for details on using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 58

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide Navigating the TV Guide On Screen® system • While watching TV, press the TV GUIDE button to open the TV Guide On Screen® system. The LISTINGS screen will appear with the current show highlighted. • When the TV Guide On Screen® system is open, pressing the TV GUIDE button from any screen will tune the TV to the show displayed in the Video Window. • Use the arrow keys on the remote control (yzx •) to highlight any show, and then press ENTER to tune to that show. • Scroll left or right (x •) to view eight days of listings. • Press MENU to display a panel menu with options for the currently Note: highlighted program or tile, including setting recordings and reminders. • The TV Guide On Screen® menus shown in this manual are for • To access another Service screen: illustration purposes only. The channels, programs, and TV Guide On Screen® information as illustrated may not be 1. Press y to highlight the Service Bar. available in your area. The options and features as illustrated 2. Press x or • to highlight a different Service (LISTINGS, SEARCH, are subject to change when updates are downloaded from the SETUP, SCHEDULE, or RECORDINGS). TV Guide On Screen® service to your TV. • The TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide supports 3. Press z to use that Service. cable-ready, cable box, and digital cable services, as well as Note: Helpful information about each Service appears in the Info Box. over-the-air broadcasts, but does not provide listings for satellite services. TV Guide On Screen® remote control functions BUTTON FUNCTION Numbers } TV GUIDE • When watching TV, opens the TV Guide On Screen® system and highlights the current show listing. • When the TV Guide On Screen® system is open, closes the TV Guide On Screen® system and tunes the TV to the show displayed in the Video Window. – (digital Numbers • For direct channel tuning, priority ordering, and channel editing. separator) – (digital separator) • For entering digital channel numbers. MENU MENU • Displays the panel menu, in which you can choose options (record, remind, keyword, etc.). INFO INFO • Cycles between levels of information, as available, in a Service screen or other type of screen. TV GUIDE ENTER • Makes a selection or executes an action. ENTER • With a currently airing show listing highlighted, returns to watching TV and tunes to the show channel. y x • • With a future airing show listing highlighted, displays a panel menu with viewing options. z y zx • • Provide directional control. PAGE UP/ • When watching TV, y and z surf through channels you set to “ON” in the LISTINGS screen. DOWN PAGE UP/DOWN • When the TV Guide On Screen® system is open, moves from one set of screen information to the next, when applicable. REC • When the TV Guide On Screen® system is open or when watching TV, starts recording. SS| and |TT ® SPLIT • When the TV Guide On Screen system is open, toggles between locking and unlocking the Video Window. REC SS| and |TT • Jump forward and backward one day in the LISTINGS screen. SPLIT Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 59

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide Navigating the TV Guide On Screen® system (continued) Video Window • When you open the TV Guide On Screen® system, the current program appears in the Video Window. • As you scroll through the listings, the Video Window will change to display the selected program. Info Box • The lock/unlock icon indicates the status of the Video Window. If you lock the Video Window: As you navigate through listings, the Video Window channel will remain on the channel it was tuned to when you locked it. If you unlock the Video Window: As you navigate through listings, the Video Window channel will change to the currently highlighted listing. To lock/unlock the Video Window: Press the SPLIT button on the remote control to toggle between locking and unlocking the Video Window. —or— Highlight a channel logo or the LISTINGS Service Bar Label and press MENU to display the option to lock/unlock the Video Window. Panel Menus • A panel menu appears: – when you press MENU on a highlighted tile (if additional options are available); or – when you press ENTER on a show starting in the future. • When a panel menu appears, the highlighted tile changes color to indicate that the panel menu relates to the tile. • Press INFO to display help for the current panel menu. • Press y and z to move among the options. • Press x and • to move to adjacent options or, if the highlight is on an odometer, to change the odometer choice. • To move the highlight to the default command button, press ENTER from an odometer or entry box. • To execute the action and close the panel menu, highlight the command button and press ENTER. • To cancel any changes and close the panel menu: – press MENU; or – highlight Cancel and press ENTER. • If a panel menu contains more options than can be displayed in one panel, the word “more” appears at the bottom of the menu. To access the additional options, either scroll down using the z button or the PAGE UP/DOWN (CH yz) button. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 60

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide Navigating the TV Guide On Screen® system (continued) Info Box • An Info Box contains information about a show, Service, or Panel Ad, or Info Action Bar provides general help (for example, for a panel menu). • An Info Box for a program in the LISTINGS screen can have up to three sizes: Small, Large, or “No.” – Press INFO on the remote control to cycle among the sizes. – The default Info Box size is Small. To change the default size, open the SETUP Service screen (see page 70). Small Info Box • The Info Button icon ( ) appears on the Info Action Bar if the Info Box size can change and/or if there are additional Info screens. Press the INFO key on the remote control to change the size and/or display additional Info screens. • In some instances, the INFO button on the remote control is used to page forward (for example, if there are additional pages of information in a Panel Large Info Box Ad, a Channel Ad, or help text). TV Guide On Screen® Icons ICON NAME DESCRIPTION Info Button • Additional Info Box information is available, or the Info Box has additional sizes. Progress Bar • Elapsed time in current show. • Progress bar appears in LISTINGS and SEARCH and when the Info Button is pressed while watching TV. HDTV • Show is presented in high-definition TV, if available. New • Show is new (not a repeat). Stereo • Show is available in stereo. Dolby Digital • Show is available with Dolby Digital 5.1 audio (digital channels only). CC • Closed captioning is available for the show. TV Rating • TV rating for the show. Record Once • Show is set to record once. • Other frequencies are Daily (manual recording only), Regularly, and Weekly. Record Off • Show is set to record but recording is currently Off (show remains in schedule). Record • Recording is suspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in schedule). Suspended • Recording resumes when the conflict no longer exists. Remind Once • Show is set to remind once. • Other frequencies are Daily (manual reminding only), Regularly, and Weekly. Remind Off • Show is set to remind but reminder is currently Off (show remains in schedule). Remind • Reminder is suspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in schedule). Suspended • Reminder resumes when the conflict no longer exists. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 61

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide TV Guide On Screen® Services The TV Guide On Screen® system consists of five main services: LISTINGS, SEARCH, RECORDINGS, SCHEDULE, and SETUP. Note: • For the RECORDINGS service to display, an IEEE1394 recording device must be connected to the television (see Chapter 2); otherwise, only four services display. Recording to other devices, such as a VCR, is possible from within the LISTINGS service. • When using the TV Guide On Screen® system to record a program for the first time, it is recommended that you perform a test recording to make sure your system is set up properly. • If the power is cut or the plug becomes disconnected during timer recording, any recorded contents will be lost. It may take up to 7 days before an entire program schedule is available. • If the TV power cord is unplugged for an extended period of time, it may take up to 24 hours with the TV in standby mode (power cord plugged in and power OFF) to download the entire TV Guide On Screen® program schedule. It may take up to 7 days before an entire program schedule is available. Be sure to follow the instructions under “TV Guide On Screen® Reminder” on page 45. LISTINGS screen • When you open the TV Guide On Screen® system, • Use the Number keys on the remote control to jump to a LISTINGS is always the first service displayed. specific channel’s listings. • To watch a show (if on now), highlight the show and press ENTER. • To display the Episode Options panel menu for a particular show, highlight a show and press MENU. • With LISTINGS highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen. Episode Options panel menu From the Episode Options panel menu, you can choose to set a recording, set a reminder, or tune to the channel. The following are descriptions of the buttons. • Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within LISTINGS GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no to do the following: information, and returns to the Service Bar. – View eight days of show listings – Read show descriptions TUNE TO CHANNEL / WATCH NOW: Exits the TV Guide On Screen® system and tunes to the show (if the show is currently airing) or tunes to the channel of the highlighted show (if the show airs in the future). The button label changes according to whether the show is currently airing or not. SET RECORDING: Displays the Record Options panel menu, from which you can set the show to record. For additional information, see “SCHEDULE screen” and “Recording features” on page 66. – Tune directly to a show currently airing SET REMINDER: Displays the Remind Options panel menu, – Set a show to Remind (e.g., start time, frequency, from which you can set a reminder for the show. For additional automatic power ON, auto-tune TV) information, see “SCHEDULE screen” on page 66 and – Set a show to Record (e.g, start/end time, frequency) “Remind features” on page 68. – Lock and unlock the Video Window CANCEL: Closes the menu, changes no information, and – Access panel ads and channel ads returns to the highlighted show. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 62

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued) SEARCH screen • SEARCH allows you to find shows by keyword, Example: Category search alphabetically, or by category (HDTV, Movies, Sports, Children, Educational, News, Variety, Series). 1. From the SEARCH screen, press z to highlight a category (in this example, MOVIES). • With SEARCH highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen. 2. Press z to highlight a subcategory (in this example, ALL). • Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within SEARCH. 3. Press ENTER to display a list of all movies, organized by date and time. 4. Highlight a show and press ENTER to watch (if on now) or press MENU to display the Episode Options panel menu. (See “Episode Options panel menu” on page 62.) Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 63

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued) SEARCH screen (continued) Example: Keyword search 6. A list of all matching shows for that keyword is displayed. Keyword search lets you enter a word(s) to find a particular show by category or for every show title that matches. 1. From the SEARCH screen, highlight KEYWORD, and then press ENTER. 2. Highlight NEW SEARCH in the panel menu, and then press ENTER. 7. Highlight a show and press ENTER to display all airings. Then highlight a specific listing and press ENTER to watch (if on now) or press MENU to display the Episode Options panel menu. From the Episode Options menu, you can choose to set a recording or reminder, or tune to the channel (see “Episode Options panel menu” on page 62.) 3. The Search Options panel menu opens. Highlight CATEGORY, and then use the arrow keys to highlight a category to search (All, HDTV, Children, Sports, etc.). 4. After highlighting a category, press z to highlight ENTER KEYWORD, and then press ENTER. The TV Guide On Screen® system stores all the keywords you create. To edit or delete a keyword: From the SEARCH/KEYWORD screen, highlight the keyword you want to edit or delete, and then press MENU 5. The keyboard is displayed. Use the arrow keys to highlight to display the Search Options panel menu, with the a character and then press ENTER to display it. When following options: finished entering all characters, highlight DONE and press – GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no ENTER. information, and returns to the Service Bar. – EDIT SEARCH: Displays the keyboard, from which you can change the keyword. – DELETE SEARCH: Displays the Confirmation panel menu. Select YES to delete the search or NO to close the panel menu. – CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no information, and returns to the highlighted keyword. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 64

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued) RECORDINGS screen The RECORDINGS service screen displays a list of shows that To view a recording, you can do one of the following: were previously recorded or are currently recording on an • Highlight an episode and press ENTER to view it now. The IEEE1394 recording device connected to the TV. episode either starts from the beginning or from where it Note: RECORDINGS will not appear in the Service Bar unless you was last stopped (if viewed previously). have an IEEE1394 video recording device connected to one of the • Highlight an episode and press MENU to display the IEEE1394 ports on the TV. See Chapter 2 for details. Episode Options panel menu, with the following options: For additional details, see “Recording features” on page 66. – GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no • With RECORDINGS highlighted in the Service Bar, press information, and returns to the Service Bar. INFO to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the – RESUME: Starts from the beginning or from where it screen. was last stopped (if viewed previously). – PLAY FROM BEGINNING: Starts from the beginning, even if stopped previously. – DELETE EPISODE: Deletes the episode from the RECORDINGS list and deletes the recording from the IEEE1394 recording device. A Confirm panel menu displays. Press YES to delete the episode or NO to close the panel menu. To choose the way recordings are displayed: – CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no 1. Highlight RECORDINGS on the Service Bar and press information, and returns to the highlighted show. MENU to display the Recording Options panel menu. 2. Press yz to choose between View As and Sort By, as described below. View As: Press x • to choose between the following: • List—Displays every recorded episode for a show (see example in Screen A, at right). Note: In List view, highlight an episode to display an Info Box with show information. Press MENU to display the Screen A Episode Options panel menu (see “Episode Options panel menu” on page 62). • Group—Displays recorded shows without listing every recorded episode (see example in Screen B, at right). Note: In Group view, highlight a show and press ENTER to view all recorded episodes. Press ENTER again to collapse the episode list. Screen B Sort By: Press x and • to choose between the following: • Title—Displays recorded shows in alphabetical order (see example in Screen A, at right). • Date—Displays recorded shows by date and time, with the most recent first. The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the 3. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject then press ENTER again to close the panel menu and you to civil and criminal liability. display the recordings with the selected options. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 65

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued) SCHEDULE screen Recording features The SCHEDULE service screen allows you to review, edit, or You can set a show to record, or edit the recording settings for a delete Record and Remind events you set previously. show, in the LISTINGS, SEARCH, and SCHEDULE screens. There are three ways to set a show to Record, as described below. 1) Set a show to Record using the REC key on the remote control Press the REC key on the remote control to record the show Once with current default settings (start and end recording on time). Each time you press REC, you change the Record frequency (but not the default settings) among Once (default), Regularly, Weekly, and Cancel. • With SCHEDULE highlighted in the Service Bar, press Note: The related Record icon appears on the show tile INFO to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close each time you press REC. See “Record icons,” on page 67. the screen. 2) Set a show to Record from a panel menu 1. Highlight a show and press MENU to display the Episode Options panel menu. 2. Highlight SET RECORDING and press ENTER to display the Record Options panel menu. • Highlight an event and press MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu, with the following options (as applicable): – GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no information, and returns to the Service Bar. – WATCH NOW: Exits the TV Guide On Screen® system and tunes to the highlighted show. 3. Highlight the FREQUENCY field, and press x or • to – SET RECORDING: Opens a menu in which you can set a choose among Once, Regularly, Weekly, or Off. recording for a show (does not cancel a set reminder). 4. Highlight the START field, and press x or • to choose – DELETE RECORDING: Removes the recording from the in the range from 120 minutes early to 120 minutes late schedule. A Confirm panel menu displays. Press YES to or On Time (default = On Time). delete the recording or NO to close the panel menu. 5. Repeat step 4 for the END field. – EDIT RECORDING: Opens a menu in which you can 6. Highlight the RECORDER field and press x or • to change existing recording information. choose the recording device. – SET REMINDER: Opens a menu in which you can set a Note: For connected IEEE1394 recording devices only. reminder for a show (does not cancel a set recording). 7. Highlight the KEEP UNTIL field and press x or • to – DELETE REMINDER: Removes the reminder from the choose how long you want to keep the Record event. Note: For connected IEEE1394 recording devices only. schedule. A Confirm panel menu displays. Press YES to delete the reminder or NO to close the panel menu. 8. Press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING, – EDIT REMINDER: Opens a menu in which you can change and press ENTER again to close the menu. existing reminder information. A Record icon for the selected frequency appears on the – CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no information, show tile. See “Record icons” on page 67. Note: For connected IEEE1394 recording devices only. and returns to the highlighted show. Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the An icon identifies the event type. For more details, see menu, change no information, and return to the “Recording features,”at right, and “Reminder features” on highlighted show. page 68. Note: You can change the default values of the Record Options panel menu fields. See “Change default options” on page 71. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 66

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued) Recording features (continued) 3) Manually set a show to Record Recording conflict 1. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar, and press A recording conflict message will appear in the following MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu. situations: 2. Highlight NEW MANUAL RECORDING and press • A show set to Record overlaps with any part of another ENTER to display the Record Options panel menu. show previously set to Record. Press yzx • to move through the options. • A show set to Record overlaps with a show previously set to Press the Number keys or yzx • to change the auto-tune. (For auto-tune details, see “Remind features” on information, as necessary. page 68.) 3. Enter the information in the panel menu fields. You will Select one of these options: need to set the start and end time for the recording. For • Record Anyway—This show will override an existing show details, see “Set a show to Record from a panel menu” on set to Record or auto-tune. the previous page. • Don’t Record This Show—Cancels the Recording. Note: When setting a Manual Recording, the frequency option “Daily” is available instead of “Regularly.” See “Record icons,” below right, for a description of the Record icons. 4. When finished entering the information in the fields, press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING, and press ENTER again to close the menu. A Record icon for the selected frequency appears on the show tile. See “Record Icons,” below right. Record icons Note: Manual recording is listed by channel number. Following is a description of the Record icons that will appear Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the on the tile for a show set to Record. menu, change no information, and return to the highlighted show. • Record Once —Records the show one time. When using the TV Guide On Screen® system to record a program for the first time, it is recommended that you perform a test recording to make • Record Regularly —Records the show every time the sure your system is set up properly. show airs on the same channel and starts at the same time. Recording notification banner • Record Weekly —Records the show every time the show • If the TV is not on, the recording occurs as scheduled. airs on the same day of the week and on the same channel, • If the TV is on and you are watching the channel that is set to and starts at the same time. record, the recording occurs as scheduled. • If the TV is on and you are watching a channel other than • Record Daily —Records on the same channel and at the the one that is set to record, a notification banner (illustrated same start time every weekday (Monday through Friday). below) appears on-screen before recording starts. At that time Note: This icon displays for manual recordings only. you can choose to start or cancel recording. The default highlighted item in the notification banner is • Record Suspend —Recording is Suspended due to a “Change channel; start recording.” If no change is made schedule conflict (show remains in the Schedule list). within 3 minutes, the notification banner will close automatically, the channel will change to the one set to record, and the recording will occur as scheduled. If you want • Record Off —Keeps the Recording in the Schedule list to cancel the recording, select “Don’t change; cancel but will not record this show until the frequency is changed. recording” in the notification banner and press ENTER. The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 67

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued) Reminder features You can set a Reminder to perform the following functions: 7. Press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE REMINDER, • Automatically turn on the TV (if off ) at the scheduled and press ENTER again to close the menu. A Remind reminder time, and tune the TV to the channel of the show icon for the selected frequency appears on the show tile. for which you set the reminder. See “Remind icons” on page 69. • Automatically tune the TV, at the scheduled reminder time, Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the to the channel of the show for which you set the reminder. menu, change no information, and return to the highlighted show. • Display an on-screen notification banner (reminding you that the show is about to start), from which you can choose to 2) Manually set a show Reminder tune the TV to the show’s channel or cancel the reminder. 1. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar, and press You can set a show reminder, or edit the reminder settings for a MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu. show, in LISTINGS, SEARCH, and SCHEDULE. There are two ways to set a show reminder, as described below. 2. Highlight NEW MANUAL REMINDER and press ENTER to display the Remind Options panel menu. 1) Set a show Reminder from a panel menu Press yzx • to move through the options. 1. Highlight a show and press MENU to display the Press the Number keys or yzx • to change the Episode Options panel menu. information, as necessary. 2. Highlight SET REMINDER and press ENTER to display the Remind Options panel menu. 3. Enter the information in the panel menu fields. You will need to set the start and end time for the reminder. For 3. Highlight the FREQUENCY field, and press x or • to details, see “Set a show Reminder from a panel menu,” choose among Once, Regularly, Weekly, or Off. at left. 4. Highlight the POWER ON TV field, and press x or • Note: When setting a Manual Reminder, the frequency option “Daily” is available instead of “Regularly.” See “Remind to choose either Yes (to turn on the TV automatically, if icons,” on the following page, for a description of Reminder off, at the scheduled Reminder time) or No (default). icons. 5. Highlight the AUTO TUNE TV field, and press x or • 4. When finished entering the information in the fields, to choose either Yes (to automatically tune the TV to the press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE REMINDER, channel you are setting the Reminder for at the and press ENTER again to close the menu. scheduled Reminder time; the TV must be on at the time) or No (default). A Remind icon for the selected frequency appears on the show tile. See “Remind icons” on the following page. Note: You can change the default values of the Remind Options panel menu fields. See “Change default options” on Note: Manual reminders are listed by channel number. page 71 for details. Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the 6. Highlight the WHEN field (to set a time for displaying menu, change no information, and return to the the reminder screen), and press x or • to choose in the highlighted show. range from 15 minutes early to 15 minutes late or On Time (default = 1 minute early). Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 68

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued) Reminder features (continued) Reminder notification banner Remind icons Based on your option settings, a notification banner will appear Following is a description of the Remind icons that will appear on-screen if your TV is on at the scheduled Reminder time. on the tile for a show set to Remind. At that time you can either press ENTER to hide the Reminder banner or highlight the show and press ENTER to tune to • Remind Once —Displays a show reminder one time. the show. If no choice is made within 3 minutes, the notification banner • Remind Regularly —Displays a show reminder every closes automatically and performs the highlighted option time the show airs on the same channel and starts at the same (default is HIDE REMINDERS). time. Note: If more than two reminders are set for the same time, arrows appear on the Reminder notification banner. Press yz • Remind Weekly —Displays a show reminder every time to highlight the shows. the show airs on the same day of the week and on the same channel, and starts at the same time. • Remind Daily —Displays a show Reminder every weekday (Monday through Friday) for the same channel and start time. Reminder conflict Note: This icon displays for manual reminders only. A conflict message will appear in the following situations: • A show set with an auto-tune Reminder has the same start • Remind Suspend —Reminder is Suspended due to a time as an existing auto-tune Reminder. schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule). • A show set with an auto-tune Reminder overlaps with a scheduled Recording. • Remind Off —Keeps the Reminder in the Schedule list Select one of these options: but will not display a reminder until you change the frequency. • Auto-Tune Anyway—This show will override an existing show set to auto-tune. • Proceed, No Auto-Tune—Set the show as a Reminder but do not auto-tune. • Don’t Set This Reminder—Cancels the Reminder. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 69

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued) SETUP screen The SETUP service screen allows you to change the following Change channel display settings: This option allows you to edit channel information that appears • System settings in LISTINGS, including the following: • Channel display • Reorder the position the channels appear in LISTINGS. • Default options • Change the “tune channel” number. Note: You must complete the TV Guide On Screen® setup (as Note: The “tune channel” is the channel on which you receive described in Chapter 5) before you can change these settings. a station. For example, two viewers in the same zip code may With SETUP highlighted in the Service Bar, highlight the receive the same station on different channel numbers, settings you want to change, press ENTER, and follow the depending on whether they have Cable service or are using a on-screen instructions. cable box. • Switch a channel to one of the following settings: – On (channel is always displayed in LISTINGS) – Off (channel is never displayed in LISTINGS) – Auto-Hide (channel is displayed in LISTINGS only when program information is available) 1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE CHANNEL With SETUP highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to DISPLAY and press ENTER. display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen. 2. Highlight the channel row you want to edit and press ENTER to display the Grid Options panel menu. Change system settings This option appears only after you have completed the initial TV Guide On Screen® setup process (as described in Chapter 5). 1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE SYSTEM SETTINGS and press ENTER. 3. To edit the options, press INFO and follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Press ENTER again to display the Confirming Your Settings screen. 3. Highlight one of the options, press ENTER, and follow the on-screen instructions. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 70

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued) SETUP screen (continued) Change default options Record defaults This option allows you to change default settings in the 1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT following categories: OPTIONS and press ENTER. • General defaults 2. Highlight RECORD DEFAULTS and press MENU to • Record defaults display the Record Defaults panel menu. • Remind defaults General defaults 1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT OPTIONS and press ENTER. 3. Enter the required information in the panel menu fields (start time, end time, recorder choice, how long to keep a Record event, the quality of the recording). See “Record features” on page 66 for details on entering values in these fields. 4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and 2. Highlight GENERAL DEFAULTS and press MENU to then press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the display the General defaults panel menu. changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with no changes). Remind defaults 1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT OPTIONS and press ENTER. 2. Highlight REMIND DEFAULTS and press MENU to display the Remind Defaults panel menu. 3. Enter the following information in the panel menu fields: • BOX SIZE: The initial Info Box size when you open the TV Guide On Screen® system. Choices are No, Small (default), Large, and Last Used. • BOX CYCLE: The Info Box size rotation when you press INFO on the remote control when the TV Guide On Screen® system is open. Choices are No Only, Small Only, Large Only, No & Small, No & Large, Small & Large, and All (default). 3. Enter the required information in the panel menu fields • AUTO GUIDE: Automatic entry into the TV Guide (power On TV, auto-tune, when to display the Remind On Screen® system when the TV is powered on. Choices screen). See “Reminder features” on page 68 for details on are On (default) and Off. entering values in these fields. Note: Set the AUTO GUIDE to Off if you do not want the 4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and TV Guide On Screen® system to open every time you turn then press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the on the TV. changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with 4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and no changes). press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with no changes). Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 71

8 Using the TV’s features Selecting the video input source to view To select the video input source to view: 1. Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the TV front panel. 2. Press 0–9 to select the input source you want to view, which will depend on the input terminals you used to connect your devices (see Chapter 2). Numbers The current signal source displays in the top right corner of the Input Selection screen. INPUT TheaterNet DEVICE Input Selection ANT 1 y 0 ANT 1 1 Video 1 2 Video 2 3 Video 3 z 4 ColorStream HD1 5 ColorStream HD2 6 HDMI 1 7 HDMI 2 8 PC 9 ANT 2 0 - 9 / INPUT to Select Note: • When the Input Selection screen is open, you also can use the yz buttons on the remote control (or the Channel yz buttons on the front panel) to change the input. • You can repeatedly press the INPUT button on the remote control Remote control or the TV/VIDEO button on the TV front panel to change the input. • To select an IEEE1394 input source, press the TheaterNet DEVICE button on the remote control (see page 31 and 51). • If an IEEE1394 device is the current input, it will appear at the bottom of the Input Selection list; however, it will not display in the TV front panel touchpad list if you change the input source. • You can label the video input sources according to the specific devices connected to the TV (see “Labeling the video input sources” on the next page). • The source can be “hidden.” See page 73 for details. { CHANNEL zy TV/VIDEO Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 72

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Labeling the video input sources You can label each video input source according to the type of 4. Press x or • to select the desired label for that input source. device you connected to each source, from the following preset If a particular input is not used, you can select “Hide” as list of labels: the label, which will cause that input to be “grayed out” in the input list and skipped over when you press the INPUT – – (default label) button on the remote control. Hide (to hide an unused input in the Input Selection Note: If you select “Hide” for all of the input labels, the POP window) feature will be disabled. If you then attempt to access the POP Audio Receiver feature, the message “NOT AVAILABLE” will appear on-screen. VCR 5. To save the new input labels, highlight Done and press Video Recorder ENTER. To revert to the factory default labels, highlight Laser Disk Reset and press ENTER. Compact Disc Input labeling example: DVD DTV The screen below left shows the default Input Selection screen (with none of the inputs labeled). The screen below right is an Satellite/DSS example of how you could label the inputs if you connected Cable a DVD player to VIDEO 1, Cable TV to VIDEO 2, an audio Game Console receiver to VIDEO 3, a video recorder to ColorStream HD1, Note: a DTV set-top box to HDMI 1, and a satellite/DSS set-top box • If you set up devices in TheaterNet,™ the associated inputs are to HDMI 2. Also note that the ColorStream HD2 input is automatically labeled and cannot be relabeled until you remove the labeled “Hidden,” which means that the input will be skipped device from TheaterNet (see page 50). over when INPUT or TV/VIDEO is pressed. • If you set up a cable box in VIDEO 1, that input will be labeled automatically and cannot be relabeled until you remove the device Input Selection ANT 1 Input Selection ANT 1 from the TV Guide On Screen® setup. 0 ANT 1 0 ANT 1 • You cannot select IEEE1394 devices through the Input Selection 1 Video 1 1 DVD window; however, you can select and control IEEE1394 devices 2 Video 2 2 Cable 3 Video 3 3 Audio Receiver through TheaterNet (see page 50). 4 ColorStream HD1 4 Video Receiver 5 ColorStream HD2 5 ColorSteram HD2 (Hidden) 6 HDMI 1 6 DTV To label the video input sources: 7 HDMI 2 7 Satellite/DSS 8 PC 8 PC 1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu. 9 ANT 2 9 ANT 2 2. Highlight Input Labeling and press ENTER. 0 - 9 / INPUT to Select 0 - 9 / INPUT to Select 3. Press y or z to highlight the video source you want to Input Selection screen Input Selection screen with label. with no inputs labeled all inputs labeled except input 5, which has been hidden. Preferences To clear the input labels: Favorite Channels Closed Caption Mode Off 1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu. Closed Caption Advanced Input Labeling 2. Highlight Input Labeling and press ENTER. Menu Language English Home CH Setup 3. Highlight Reset and press ENTER. Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Note: If you set up a device in TheaterNet, its input label will not be cleared unless you remove the device from TheaterNet Input Labeling (see page 50). Video 1 DVD Video 2 Cable Video 3 Audio Receiver ColorStream HD 1 Video Receiver ColorStream HD 2 Hide HDMI 1 DTV HDMI 2 Satellite/DSS PC -- ANT 2 -- Reset Done Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 73

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Tuning channels Using the Channel Browser™ The Channel Browser stores in the channel history up to 32 of the most recently viewed channels. This feature allows you to: • Keep a separate, temporary* history of the last 32 channels tuned from each of three inputs: ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box. *Note: Turning off the TV will clear the channel history for all three inputs. • Quickly surf and tune your recently viewed channels from the Channel Browser banner (illustrated below). • Surf via Browse mode (to immediately tune channels as you highlight them in the Channel Browser banner) or Select mode (to surf over channels in the browser banner before you select one to tune). • Set a “HOME” channel for the ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box inputs. To open the Channel Browser banner: Press x ( ), • ( ), or ENTER on the remote control. – Press x ( ) to surf back from the most recently viewed channel through the last 32 channels that were tuned from the current input, which are automatically stored in the channel history for the current input (ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box only). – Press • ( ) to surf forward from the previous channels in the channel history up to the most recently viewed channel. Elements of the Channel Browser banner Active channel Highlighted channel Channels stored Active channel Home channel instructions status (Displays with a yellow in the channel (In Browse mode, because the highlighted [Press x ( ) or • ( ) (Displays in this area background in Select mode. history channel is tuned automatically, the active to surf the other channels only if available.) Displays with a yellow channel and the highlighted channel in the channel history.] outline in Browse mode.) will always be the same.) 12-3 14 26-1 17-2 3 Hold HOME key 12345678 ABCD-DTV QRS TUV XYZ 3 sec to program CB Select Mode ANT 1 CABLE 3 XYZ 480p 17-2 Current mode Current Current Active Channel call Resolution Home channel (Select or Browse) input antenna type channel letters (cable or TV) number (if available) To toggle between Browse mode and Select mode: After opening the Channel Browser banner, press y or z to toggle between Browse mode and Select mode. The “Current mode” field on the Channel Browser banner will flash green. Note: The Channel Browser banner opens in Browse mode by default. To tune to a channel in Browse mode: To tune to a channel in Select mode: 1. While watching TV, press x ( ) or •( ) to open the 1. While watching TV, press x ( ) or •( ) to open the Channel Browser banner and surf back to a previous channel Channel Browser banner and surf back to a previous channel or surf forward to the next channel in the channel history. or surf forward to the next channel in the channel history. In Browse mode, when you stop on a channel number in In Select mode, when you stop on a channel number in the browser banner, it will be highlighted with a yellow the browser banner, it will be highlighted with a yellow outline and the TV will automatically tune to the channel. background but the TV will not automatically tune to the 2. Press EXIT to close the Channel Browser banner. channel. 2. Press ENTER to tune the TV to the highlighted channel. 3 2 102-1 Hold HOME key 3 sec to program 3. Press EXIT to close the Channel Browser banner. Browse Mode ANT 1 CABLE Ch.102-1 1080i Ch.3 3 2 102-1 Hold HOME key In Browse mode, the highlighted channel number is outlined 3 sec to program in yellow and the channel will be tuned to automatically. Select Mode ANT 1 CABLE Ch.102-1 1080i Ch.3 Note: The Channel Browser banner will close automatically if In Select mode, the highlighted channel number has a you do not make a selection within 60 seconds. yellow background. Press ENTER to tune to the channel. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 74

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Tuning channels (continued) Using the Channel Browser™ (continued) Adding and clearing channels in the Setting a channel as the “Home” channel channel history for an input Adding channels to the channel history To set a channel as Home using the remote control: The Channel Browser automatically creates a temporary* history 1. Tune the TV to the channel you would like to set as the of the last 32 channels that were tuned in the current input Home channel for the current antenna input. (ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box inputs only). A separate 2. Press and hold the HOME ( ) button on the remote history will be stored for each of these inputs. control for 3 seconds. When the Home channel is saved, *Note: Turning off the TV will clear the channel history for all the Channel Browser banner will appear at the bottom of three inputs. the screen with the home icon flashing green. If you change the input you are viewing: Note: You can set a different Home channel for each input a) you will begin a channel history for that input if one had (ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box inputs only). not already been started; or To set a channel as Home using the menus: b) you will return to the existing channel history for that input 1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu. if one had already been started. 2. Highlight Home CH Setup and press ENTER. The Home The Channel Browser will store the following channels: CH Setup window will display. • All channels that are tuned using the numeric buttons on the Home CH Setup remote control. ANT 1 -- • All channels that are tuned for at least 7 seconds using the ANT 2 -- CH yz buttons or the FAV CH yz buttons on the remote Cable Box -- control. Reset Done Note: • The Channel Browser banner will not appear when the POP double Note: "Cable Box" will appear in the Home CH Setup window is open; however, channels tuned while the POP double window only if you connected a cable box to your TV. window is open will be added to the Channel Browser history for the 3. Use the y z buttons to select the input for which you current input. want to set the Home channel. • The Channel Browser banner will not appear in the FAV SCAN (favorite scan) multi-window. Channels that appear in the FAV SCAN 4. Use the numeric and dash (–) buttons on the remote multi-window will not be added to the Channel Browser history; control to enter the desired Home channel for each input. however, the channel last selected from the multi-window will be 5. To save your entries, highlight Done and press ENTER. added to the channel history. To clear your entries, highlight Reset and press ENTER. Clearing channels from the channel history To tune to the Home channel: • Turning off the TV will clear all three channel histories While an input that has a set (ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box). Home channel is active, press the • Removing the CableCARD™ will clear the channel history HOME ( ) button on the for the ANT 1 input. remote control. • Reconfiguring the ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box input Note: If you press the HOME will clear the channel history for the newly configured button while an input other than input(s). an antenna or Cable Box input is x /BACK Note: See page 46 for details on configuring the antenna inputs. selected, the TV will tune to the •/NEXT most recently tuned Home channel and input. HOME ( ) Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 75

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Tuning channels (continued) Tuning your favorite channels Switching between two channels using To tune to the channels you programmed as Favorite Channels, Channel Return see page 49. The Channel Return feature allows you to switch between two channels without entering an actual channel number each time. Tuning to the next programmed channel 1. Select the first channel you want to view. 2. Select a second channel using the Channel Number buttons To tune to the next programmed channel: (and the dash (–) button if selecting a digital channel). Press CHANNEL y or z on the remote control or TV front 3. Press CH RTN on the remote control. The previous panel. channel will display. Each time you press CH RTN, the TV Note: will switch back and forth between the last two channels • This feature will not work unless you program channels into the that were tuned. TV’s channel memory (see page 47). Note: • If you are recording a digital channel, you will only be able to • If you press CH RTN from a non-antenna input, the TV will change analog channels while the recording is in progress. If you return to the last-viewed ANT input and channel. are recording an analog channel, you will only be able to change • If you are currently recording a program, this feature will digital channels while the recording is in progress. This is not be available. because the TV tuner that is being recorded (digital or analog) will be locked on the channel that is currently recording. Switching between two channels using Tuning to a specific channel SurfLock™ (programmed or unprogrammed) The SurfLock™ feature temporarily “memorizes” one channel in the CH RTN button, so you can return to that channel quickly Tuning analog channels: from any other channel by pressing CH RTN. To memorize a Press the Channel Number buttons (0–9) on the remote channel in the CH RTN button: control. For example, to select channel 125, press 1, 2, 5. 1. Tune the TV to the channel you want to program into the Tuning digital channels: CH RTN button. Press the Channel Number buttons (0–9) on the remote 2. Press and hold CH RTN for about 2 seconds until the control, followed by the – (dash) button and then the sub- message “Channel Memorized” appears on the screen. The channel number. For example, to select digital channel 125-1, channel has been programmed into the CH RTN button. press 1, 2, 5, –, 1. 3. You can then change channels repeatedly, and when you Note: If a digital channel is not programmed—either press CH RTN, the memorized channel will be selected. through the automatic channel scan (page 47) or the channel add/delete function (page 48)—you will have to tune the RF The TV will return to the memorized channel one time only. channel using the Channel Number and Dash buttons on the Once you press CH RTN and then change channels again, the remote control. CH RTN memory will be cleared and the button will function as Channel Return, by switching back and forth between the last two channels that were tuned. Channel Numbers — (dash) CHANNEL yz CH RTN Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 76

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Selecting the picture size You can view many program formats in a variety of picture sizes—Natural, TheaterWide 1, TheaterWide 2, TheaterWide 3, and Full—as described below and on the next page. The way the image displays in any of the picture sizes will vary Numbers depending on the format of the program you are viewing. Select the picture size that displays the current program the way that PIC SIZE looks best to you. Your picture size preferences can be saved for each input on your TV. y To select the picture size: z 1. Press PIC SIZE on the remote control. 2. While the Picture Size menu is on-screen, press the corresponding number button (0–4) to select the desired picture size. Note: Picture Size You also can select the picture size using the 0 Natural 1 TheaterWide 1 menu system. Select Picture Size in the 2 TheaterWide 2 Video/Theater Settings menu. Select the input 3 TheaterWide 3 for which you want to save your picture settings. 4 Full To save your settings, highlight Done and press 0 - 4 / PIC SIZE to Select ENTER. Note: Theater Settings • You also can repeatedly press PIC SIZE to select the desired Picture Size Natural Picture Scroll -- picture size (or press the yz buttons on the remote control Cinema Mode Film while the Picture Size screen is open). Auto Aspect Ratio On • “Full” may not be available for some program formats (it will Reset Done be “grayed out” in the Picture Size screen). Natural picture size • The image is displayed close to its originally formatted proportion. Some program formats will display with sidebars and/or bars at the top and bottom. Natural picture size example: The way the image displays will vary depending on the format of the program you are currently watching. Conventional picture on a Conventional picture in Natural size on conventional TV screen your wide-screen TV Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 77

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Selecting the picture size (continued) TheaterWide 1 picture size (For 4:3 format program) Note: • The center of the picture remains close to its • If you select one of the TheaterWide® picture sizes, the top and bottom edges of the original proportion, but the left and right picture (including subtitles or captions) may edges are stretched wider to fill the screen. be hidden. To view the hidden edges, either scroll the picture (TheaterWide 2 and 3 only) or try viewing the program in Full or Natural picture size. • When selecting the picture size, the way the image displays will vary depending on the format of the program you are currently watching. TheaterWide 1 picture size example TheaterWide 2 picture size (for letter box programs) Using these functions to change the picture size (i.e., changing the height/ • The picture is stretched wider to fill the width width ratio) for any purpose other than of the screen, but only slightly stretched taller. your private viewing may be prohibited • The top and bottom edges of the picture under the Copyright Laws of the United are hidden. To view the hidden areas, see ABCDEFG---------------- States and other countries, and may “Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture” on subject you to civil and criminal liability. page 79. TheaterWide 2 picture size example TheaterWide 3 picture size (for letter box programs with subtitles) • The picture is stretched wider to fill the width of the screen, but only slightly stretched taller. • The top and bottom edges are hidden. To view the hidden areas (such as subtitles or captions), ABCDEFG---------------- see “Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture” on page 79. ABCDEFG-------------------------- TheaterWide 3 picture size example Full picture size (for 16:9 [480i, 480p] source programs only) • If receiving a squeezed 4:3 format program, the picture is stretched wider to fill the width of the screen, but not stretched taller. • None of the picture is hidden. Full picture size example Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 78

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture Using the auto aspect ratio feature (TheaterWide 2 and 3 only) When the auto aspect ratio feature is set to On, the picture size is automatically selected when one of the following input You can set separate scroll settings for the TheaterWide 2 and sources is received: TheaterWide 3 modes for each input. • A 480i signal from the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, To set the scroll settings: ColorStream HD-1, or ColorStream HD-2 input. 1. Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the • A 1080i, 480i, 480p, or 720p signal from the HDMI input. TV to select the input for which you want to set the picture size and scroll settings. Aspect ratio Automatic aspect size of signal source (automatically selected 2. Press MENU and open the Video menu. when Auto Aspect is On) 3. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER. 4:3 normal Natural (with sidebars) 4:3 letter box TheaterWide 2 16:9 full Full Video Picture Settings Not defined Advanced Picture Settings (no ID-1 data or User-selected picture size Theater Settings HDMI aspect data) (see pages 77–78) Note: • The auto aspect ratio feature is not applicable to antenna or Cable input Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit sources. 4. In the Picture Size field, select either TheaterWide 2 or • The auto aspect ratio feature is not available when the POP double- TheaterWide 3 (you cannot scroll in any other mode). window is open, the Freeze mode is active, or the TV Guide On Screen® 5. Press z to highlight the Picture Scroll field. system is open. 6. Press x or • to scroll the picture up and down as needed, To turn on the auto aspect ratio feature: from –10 to +20. 1. Press MENU and open the Video menu. Theater Settings 2. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER. Picture Size TheaterWide 2 Picture Scroll -5 Cinema Mode Film Auto Aspect Ratio On Video Picture Settings Reset Done Advanced Picture Settings Theater Settings 7. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset and press ENTER. Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit 3. In the Auto Aspect Ratio field, select On. Theater Settings Picture Size Natural Picture Scroll -1 Cinema Mode Film Auto Aspect Ratio On Reset Done 4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset and press ENTER. To turn off the auto aspect ratio feature: Select Off in step 3 above. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 79

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Selecting the cinema mode Selecting the lamp mode (480i signals only) You can select either High Bright or Low Power lamp mode. • High Bright mode is useful when additional picture When you view a DVD (480i signal; 3:2 pulldown processed) brightness is desired (such as in a bright room). from a DVD player connected to the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, ColorStream HD1/HD2 (component video), or HDMI inputs • Low Power mode reduces wear on the projection lamp. Using on the TV, smoother motion can be obtained by setting the this mode should result in longer lamp life. Cinema Mode to Film. See “Lamp unit replacement and care” on page 129–131. To set the Cinema Mode to Film: To select the lamp mode: 1. Press MENU and open the Video menu. 1. Press MENU and open the Video menu. 2. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER. 2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER. Video Video Picture Settings Picture Settings Advanced Picture Settings Advanced Picture Settings Theater Settings Theater Settings Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit 3. In the Cinema Mode field, select Film. 3. In the Lamp Mode field, select High Bright or Low Power, Theater Settings whichever you prefer. Picture Size Natural Advanced Picture Settings ANT 1 Picture Scroll -1 Dynamic Contrast On Cinema Mode Film MPEG Noise Reduction Low Auto Aspect Ratio On CableClear Off Reset Done Color Temperature Medium Lamp Mode Low Power 4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press Color Management ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset Reset Done and press ENTER. 4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press To set the Cinema Mode to Video: ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset Select Video in step 3 above. and press ENTER. Note: If you set the lamp mode to Low Power, each time you turn on the TV, the lamp will start out in High Bright mode but will switch to Low Power mode in approximately 1 minute. You will notice a change in screen brightness when this happens. This is normal and is not a sign of malfunction. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 80

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Using the POP features Using the POP double-window feature Note: The POP (picture-out-picture) double-window feature splits the screen into two • When the main window is in ANT1 or ANT2 mode, windows so you can watch two programs at the same time. the ANT1 and ANT2 inputs cannot be selected for To display a program in the POP window: the POP window. 1. Select the program you want to watch in the main window. • When the main window is in Video 1, Video 2, Video 3, ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2, 2. Press SPLIT to open the POP double-window. HDMI 1, or HDMI 2 mode, that same input POP double-window cannot be selected for the POP window. • You cannot view IEEE1394 source programs in the POP window. • You cannot view two video or two antenna sources in both the main and POP windows simultaneously. Main window POP window (You can view a video source in one window and an antenna source in the other.) ANT1 POP TV12 Video1 • The FREEZE feature is not available when the POP double-window is open. If you press FREEZE when the POP double-window is open, the message “Not available” will appear. Green border (denotes active window) 3. Press • to highlight the POP (right) window. When highlighted, the window will have a green border. 4. Press INPUT to open the POP Input Selection window. Select the input source for the POP window by pressing the corresponding Number button (0–9). The Numbers current source displays in purple in the POP Input Selection window. INPUT Note: If you labeled all of the inputs as POP Input Selection HIDE (page 73), the POP feature will be 0 ANT 1 1 Video 1 disabled and the message “NOT 2 Video 2 AVAILABLE” will appear on-screen if you try • 3 Video 3 to open the POP double-window. 4 ColorStream HD1 5 ColorStream HD2 ENTER 6 HDMI 1 7 HDMI 2 8 PC 9 ANT 2 0 - 9 / INPUT to Select SPLIT To tune to the highlighted window (and close the POP window): Press ENTER after highlighting the window you want to view as a normal picture. To close the POP window: Press SPLIT or EXIT. Notes about recording: • If the POP window is open and you attempt to start recording, the POP window will close before recording starts. • If you use the TV’s remote control to start recording, you will not be able to open the POP window and the message “Not Available” will appear on-screen if you try to do so. • It is recommended that you use the TV’s remote control to start recording. If you use a device other than the TV’s remote control to start recording, you may be able to open the POP window during the recording process. If this happens, the recorded audio will reflect the audio of the active window (main or POP), which may not be the audio you intended to record. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 81

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Using the POP features (continued) Switching the speaker audio (main or POP) While the POP window is open, press x or • to switch the audio (main or POP) that is output from the TV speakers (and also from the VARIABLE AUDIO OUT terminals). The window with the active sound is outlined with a green border. Example: Press x Example: Press • x• POP double-window aspect ratio The POP double-window feature displays each picture according to its input signal aspect ratio, as illustrated in the examples below. 480i 480i 480p/720p/1080i 480i Note: • The auto aspect ratio feature (page 79) does not operate in POP double-window mode. • Aspect ratio is the ratio of width to height of the picture. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 82

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Using the FREEZE feature To use the FREEZE feature: 1. When viewing the TV, press FREEZE to make the picture a still picture. 2. To return to the moving picture, either press FREEZE again, press EXIT, or press Using the FREEZE function for any any other button. purpose other than your private viewing Note: may be prohibited under the Copyright • The FREEZE feature is not available when the POP double-window or FAV SCAN Laws of the United States and other multi-window is open. If you press FREEZE when either window is open, the message countries, and may subject you to civil “Not available” will appear. and criminal liability. • If the TV is left in FREEZE mode for more than 15 minutes, the FREEZE mode will automatically be released and the TV will return to the moving picture. y x • z ENTER Moving picture Still picture EXIT Using the favorite channel scan feature FREEZE You can use this feature to quickly scan and tune the channels you programmed as FAV SCAN favorite channels (for the ANT 1 and ANT 2 inputs only) from a nine-picture multi-window. Note: To use the favorite channel scan feature, you must first program channels into the favorite channel memory. See “Programming your favorite channels” on page 49. To scan and tune your favorite channels: 1. Press FAV SCAN. The TV will display the channels you programmed as favorite channels for the current ANT input in a nine-picture multi-window. (To display the channels you programmed as favorite channels for the other ANT input, you must change antenna inputs first (page 72), and then press FAV SCAN.) 1 2 3 2 4–1 4–2 4 5 6 6 11 13 7 8 9 CABLE 18 18 31 36 2. Highlight the window for the channel you want to view: Either... Press the channel’s multi-window position number (1–9, as illustrated above, and not the actual channel number) to highlight the window; Or... Use the y z x • buttons to highlight the window. The highlighted window will display as a moving picture. 3. Press ENTER to tune the TV to the highlighted channel and close the multi-window. 2 4–1 4–2 6 11 13 18 31 36 Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 83

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Adjusting the picture Selecting the picture mode Adjusting the picture quality You can select your desired picture settings from four different You can adjust the picture quality (contrast, brightness, color, modes, as described below. tint, and sharpness) to your personal preferences. Mode Picture Quality Selection x Pressing • Sports Bright and dynamic picture (factory setting) contrast lower higher Standard Standard picture settings (factory setting) brightness darker lighter Movie Lower contrast for darkened room (factory setting) color paler deeper Preference Your personal preferences tint reddish greenish sharpness softer sharper To select the picture mode using the remote control: To adjust the picture quality: Press PIC MODE on the remote control. 1. Press MENU and open the Video menu. The following popup menu appears 2. Highlight Picture Settings and press ENTER. on-screen. Picture Settings Mode: Standard Mode Standard Video Picture Settings Repeatedly press PIC MODE to cycle PIC Advanced Picture Settings among the modes or use x or • to MODE Theater Settings select the picture mode you prefer. 3. Press y or z to select the picture quality you want to adjust To select the picture mode using the menu system: (contrast, brightness, color, tint, or sharpness), and then x and • to adjust the setting, as described in the table 1. Press MENU and open the Video menu. above. 2. Highlight Picture Settings and press ENTER. Picture Settings ANT 1 Mode Sports Contrast 100 Brightness 50 Video Color 50 Picture Settings Advanced Picture Settings Tint 0 Theater Settings Sharpness 50 Reset Done 3. In the Mode field, select the picture mode you prefer. Picture Settings Mode: Preference Picture Settings ANT 1 Contrast 70 Mode Sports Contrast Brightness 100 50 4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press Color 50 ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset Tint Sharpness 0 50 and press ENTER. Reset Done The picture qualities you adjusted are automatically saved in the Picture Settings Mode: Standard Preference mode (see “Selecting the picture mode,” above left). Mode Standard 4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset and press ENTER. Note: • The picture mode you select affects the current input only (ANT 1 in the example above). You can select a different picture mode for each input. • If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports, Standard, or Movie) and then change a picture quality setting (for example, increase the contrast or change the color temperature), the picture mode automatically changes to Preference in the Picture Settings menu. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 84

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Adjusting the picture (continued) Using the Color Management feature The Color management feature allows you to adjust the hue 6. Press y or z to select either Hue or Saturation, and then and saturation of six colors: red, green, blue, yellow, magenta, press x and • to adjust the setting. and cyan. Hue +2 To change the Color Management settings: Saturation +2 1. Press Menu and open the Video menu. 2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER. 7. Press ENTER to return to the Color Management window. 8. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press Video ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset Picture Settings and press ENTER. Advanced Picture Settings Theater Settings Note: • If you select Off in step 4 above, you cannot adjust the Hue 3. Highlight Color Management and press ENTER. or Saturation. • If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports, Advanced Picture Settings ANT 1 Standard, or Movie) and then change the Color Management Dynamic Contrast On to “On,” the picture mode automatically changes to MPEG Noise Reduction Low Preference in the Picture Settings menu (page 84). CableClear Auto Color Temperature Cool Lamp Mode Low Power Color Management Reset Done 4. In the Color Management field, select On. 5. Press y or z to highlight the color you want to adjust, and then press ENTER. Color Management Color Management On Hue Saturation Red –15 +15 Green 0 0 Blue –15 +15 Yellow 0 0 Magenta –15 +15 Cyan 0 0 Reset Done Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 85

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Adjusting the picture (continued) Using CableClear®/DNR (digital noise Selecting the color temperature reduction) You can change the quality of the picture by selecting from three preset color temperatures (cool, medium, and warm), as The CableClear® digital noise reduction feature allows you to described below. reduce visible interference in your TV picture. This may be useful when receiving a broadcast with a weak signal (especially Mode Picture Quality a Cable channel) or playing a noisy video cassette or disc. This cool blueish feature is enabled for 480i signals only. medium neutral Note: The CableClear DNR feature does not function in warm reddish ColorStream, HDMI (DVI), ATSC, IEEE1394, or digital Cable mode. To select the color temperature: To change the CableClear/DNR settings: 1. Press MENU and open the Video menu. 1. Press MENU and open the Video menu. 2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER. 2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER. Video Picture Settings Video Advanced PictureSettings Advanced Picture Settings Theater Settings Picture Settings Advanced Picture Settings Theater Settings 3. In the Color Temperature field, select the mode you prefer 3. In the CableClear/DNR field, select your desired setting. (Cool, Medium, or Warm). Advanced Picture Settings ANT 1 Advanced Picture Settings ANT 1 Dynamic Contrast On Dynamic Contrast On MPEG Noise Reduction Low MPEG Noise Reduction Low CableClear Auto CableClear Auto Color Temperature Cool Color Temperature Cool Lamp Mode Low Power Lamp Mode Low Power Color Management Color Management Reset Done Reset Done Note: • If the current input is ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, or 4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press VIDEO 3, the menu will display the text “CableClear.” The ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset available selections are Off, Low, Middle, High, and Auto. and press ENTER. • If the current input is ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2, or Note: HDMI, and the video resolution is 480i, the menu will display If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports, the text “DNR.” The available selections are Off, Low, Middle, Standard, or Movie) and then change the color temperature High, and Auto. Auto will react proportionally to the strength of mode, the picture mode automatically changes to Preference in the noise. Low, Middle, and High will reduce the noise in the Picture Settings menu. varying degrees, from lowest to highest, respectively. • If the current input is ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2, or HDMI, and the video resolution is not 480i, the menu will display the text “DNR”. 4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset and press ENTER. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 86

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Adjusting the picture (continued) Using MPEG noise reduction Using dynamic contrast The MPEG noise reduction feature allows you to reduce visible When dynamic contrast is set to “On,” the TV will detect interference caused by MPEG compression. Choices for MPEG changes in the picture quality that affect the appearance of your noise reduction are High, Medium, Low, and Off. Off is contrast settings and then automatically adjust the video. automatically selected when this feature is disabled (“grayed When dynamic contrast is set to “Off,” the settings selected in out”). This feature is not available in the PC input mode. the Contrast field in Picture Settings will be used. To select the MPEG noise reduction level: To select dynamic contrast preferences: 1. Press MENU and open the Video menu. 1. Press MENU and open the Video menu. 2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER. 2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER. Video Video Picture Settings Picture Settings Advanced Picture Settings Advanced Picture Settings Theater Settings Theater Settings 3. Press y or z to highlight the MPEG Noise Reduction 3. In the Dynamic Contrast field, select either On or Off. field, and then press x or • to select either High, Middle, Low, or Off. Advanced Picture Settings ANT 1 Dynamic Contrast On MPEG Noise Reduction Low Advanced Picture Settings ANT 1 CableClear Auto Dynamic Contrast On Color Temperature Cool MPEG Noise Reduction Low Lamp Mode Low Power CableClear Auto Color Management Color Temperature Cool Lamp Mode Low Power Reset Done Color Management Reset Done 4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset 4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press and press ENTER. ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset Note: and press ENTER. If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports, Standard, or Movie) and then set the dynamic contrast to “On,” the picture mode will automatically change to Preference in the Picture Settings menu. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 87

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Using the closed caption mode The closed caption mode has two options: Advanced closed captions • Captions—An on-screen display of the dialogue, narration, and sound effects of TV programs and videos that are You can customize the closed caption display characteristics by closed captioned (usually marked “CC” in program guides). changing the text size, type, edge, color, and the background color. • Text—An on-screen display of information not related to the current program, such as weather or stock data (when Note: provided by individual stations). • This feature is available for digital channels only. • You cannot set the Caption Text and Background as the same color. To view captions or text: 1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu. To customize the closed captions: 2. Highlight Closed Caption Mode and then press •. 1. Press MENU and open 3. Press z or y to select the desired closed caption mode and the Preferences menu. Preferences press ENTER. 2. Highlight Closed Favorite Channels Closed Caption Mode CC1 Caption Advanced and Closed Caption Advanced press ENTER. Input Labeling Menu Language English Home CH Setup Preferences Favorite Channels Off 3. Press y or z to Closed Caption Mode Off CC1 highlight the Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Closed Caption Advanced CC2 Input Labeling CC3 characteristic you want Menu Language Home CH Setup English CC4 T1 to change, and then T2 press x or • Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit to select the Advanced Closed Captions format for Caption Size Auto • To view captions: that Caption Text Type Auto Caption Text Edge Auto Highlight CC1, characteristic. Caption Text Color Auto CC2, CC3, or CC4. 4. To save the Background Color Auto (CC1 displays new settings, Reset Done translation of the highlight primary language in Done and press ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, your area.) highlight Reset and press ENTER. Giant pandas eat leaves. Note: If the program Caption Size Auto, Small, Standard, Large or video you selected is not closed captioned, no captions will display on-screen. Caption Text Type Auto, Default, Mono w. Serif, Prof. w. Serif, Mono w/o Serif, Prop w/o Serif, Casual, • To view text: Cursive, Small Capitals Highlight T1, T2, T3, Caption Text Edge Auto, None, Raised, Depressed, Uniform, or T4. Left Drop Shadow, Right Drop shadow Note: If text is not Caption Text Color Auto, Black, White, Red, Green, Blue, available in your WORLD WEATHER Yellow, Magenta, Cyan Temps Current area, a black F C Weather LONDON 51 11 Clear Background Color Auto, Black, White, Red, Green, Blue, rectangle may MOSCOW PARIS 57 53 14 12 Cloudy Clear appear on your ROME 66 19 Cloudy Yellow, Magenta, Cyan TOKYO 65 18 Rain screen. If this happens, turn off the Closed Caption Mode. • To turn off the Closed Caption mode: Select Off in step 3 above. Note: A closed caption signal may not display in the following situations: • When a videotape has been dubbed • When the signal reception is weak • When the signal reception is non-standard Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 88

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Using the closed caption mode (continued) Digital closed captions You can use the Digital CC/Audio selector to select digital closed caption services (if available), which will temporarily override closed captions for digital channels only. When such services are not available, the Digital CC/Audio selector presents a default list of services. If the selected service is not available, the next best service will be used instead. To select digital closed captions: 1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu. 2. Highlight Digital CC/Audio Selector and press ENTER. Applications TV Guide On Screen Audio Player Picture Viewer Digital CC/Audio Selector CableCARD Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit 3. Press y or z to select Closed Caption, and then press x or • to select the desired service. Audio CC 1 Closed Caption Service 1 4. Press ENTER. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 89

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Adjusting the audio Muting the sound Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts Press MUTE to partially reduce (1/2 MUTE) or turn off The multi-channel TV sound (MTS) feature allows you to (MUTE) the sound. Each time you press MUTE, the mute output high-fidelity stereo sound. MTS also can transmit a mode will change in the following order: second audio program (SAP) containing a second language, music, or other audio information (when provided by individual → 1/2 Mute → Mute → Volume → stations). If the closed caption mode is set to Off when you select The MTS feature is not available when the TV is in VIDEO “MUTE” mode, the closed caption feature is automatically mode. When the TV receives a stereo or SAP broadcast, the activated. To mute the audio without automatically activating word “STEREO” or “SAP” appears on-screen when RECALL is the closed caption feature, use the VOL z button to set the pressed. volume to 0. See “Using the closed caption mode” on page 88 To listen to stereo sound: for more information on closed caption modes. 1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu. Audio 2. Highlight Audio Setup Audio Settings Advanced Audio Settings and press ENTER. Audio Setup VOL z RECALL 3. In the MTS field, select Audio Setup MUTE Stereo. MTS Language Stereo English Speakers On Optical Output Format Dolby Digital Using the digital audio selector Reset Done You can use the Digital CC/Audio selector to conveniently 4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press switch between audio tracks on a digital channel (for those ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults, channels that have multiple audio tracks). This temporarily highlight Reset and press ENTER. overrides the audio track chosen by the language option under Note: Audio Setup (see “Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts,” at right). • If you leave the TV in Stereo mode it will automatically output the To use the digital audio selector: type of sound being broadcast (stereo or monaural). 1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu. • If the stereo sound is noisy, select MONO to reduce the noise. 2. Highlight Digital CC/Audio Selector and press ENTER. To listen to an alternate language on an ATSC digital station (if available): Applications Highlight the Language field in step 3 above, and then TV Guide On Screen press x or • to select the language you prefer. Audio Player Picture Viewer Digital CC/Audio Selector CableCARD To listen to a second audio program on an analog station (if available): Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Select SAP in step 3 above. Note: 3. Press y or z to select Audio, and then press x or • to • A second audio program (SAP) can be heard only on TV select the desired service. stations that offer it. For example, a station might broadcast another language as a second audio program. If you have SAP Audio CC 1 on, you will see the current program on the screen but hear the Closed Caption Service 1 other language instead of the program’s normal audio. • If you have SAP on and the station you are watching is not 4. Press ENTER. broadcasting a second audio program, the station’s normal audio will be output. However, occasionally there is no sound at all in SAP mode. If this happens, set the MTS feature to Stereo mode. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 90

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Adjusting the audio (continued) Adjusting the audio quality Using the StableSound® feature You can adjust the audio quality by adjusting the bass, treble, The StableSound® feature limits the highest volume level to and balance. prevent extreme changes in volume when the signal source To adjust the audio quality: changes (for example, to prevent the sudden increase in volume that often happens when a TV program switches to a 1. Press MENU and open the Audio commercial). Audio menu. Audio Settings Advanced Audio Settings To turn on the StableSound® feature: 2. Highlight Audio Settings Audio Setup and press ENTER. 1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu. 2. Highlight Audio Settings and press ENTER. 3. Press zor y to highlight Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit the item you want to adjust (bass, treble, or balance). Audio Audio Settings Audio Settings Advanced Audio Settings Bass 100 Audio Setup Treble 100 Balance 0 SBS On SBS Level 85 StableSound Off Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Reset Done 4. Press x or • to adjust the level. 3. In the StableSound field, select On. • x makes the bass or treble weaker or increases the balance Audio Settings Bass 100 in the left channel (depending on the item selected). Treble 100 Balance 0 • • makes the bass or treble stronger or increases the balance SBS On in the right channel (depending on the item selected). SBS Level StableSound 85 On 5. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press Reset Done ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults, highlight Reset and press ENTER. 4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset and press ENTER. Using the sub-bass system (SBS) Note: The RESET function returns your audio adjustments to the following factory settings: The sub-bass system allows you to enhance bass performance, even when the volume is low. Bass ............. center (50) Treble .......... center (50) To turn on the SBS and adjust the level: Balance ........ center (0) 1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu. StableSound ... Off 2. Highlight Audio settings and press ENTER. 3. In the SBS field, select On. To turn off the StableSound feature: 4. Press y or z to highlight SBS Level, and then press x or • Select Off in step 3 above. to adjust the sub-bass system. Audio Settings Bass 100 Treble 100 Balance 0 SBS On SBS Level 85 StableSound Off Reset Done 5. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults, highlight Reset and press ENTER. To turn off the SBS: Select Off in step 3. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 91

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Adjusting the audio (continued) Using the SRS™ WOW™ surround sound Using the virtual surround sound feature feature (Dolby® Virtual/TruSurround™) WOW™ is a special combination of SRS Labs audio The Dolby* Virtual/TruSurround feature allows you to enjoy technologies (SRS 3D, FOCUS, and TruBass) that creates a virtual surround sound from the TV’s speakers. This feature thrilling surround sound experience with deep, rich bass from is enabled only when the TV is receiving digital broadcasts. stereo sound sources. Your TV’s audio will sound fuller, richer, To turn on the Dolby Virtual/TruSurround feature: and wider. 1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu. To adjust the WOW™ settings: 2. Highlight Advanced Audio Settings and press ENTER. 1. Put the TV in STEREO mode (see “Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts” on page 90). 2. Press MENU and open the Audio menu. Audio Audio Settings 3. Highlight Advanced Audio Settings and press ENTER. Advanced Audio Settings Audio Setup Audio 3. In the Dolby Virtual/TruSurround field, select On. Audio Settings Advanced Audio Settings Advanced Audio Settings WOW: SRS 3D Off Audio Setup WOW: FOCUS Off WOW: TruBass Low Dolby Virtual 4. Press z or y to highlight the WOW feature you want to TruSurround On adjust, and then press x or • to adjust the item. Reset Done Advanced Audio Settings 4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press WOW: SRS 3D Off WOW: FOCUS Off ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset WOW: TruBass Low and press ENTER. Dolby Virtual On TruSurround To turn off theDolby Virtual/TruSurround feature: Reset Done Select Off in step 3 above. • WOW: SRS 3D — To turn the surround sound effect Note: The Dolby Virtual/TruSurround and WOW SRS 3D On or Off. features cannot be on at the same time. If you set one to Note: If the broadcast is monaural, the SRS 3D effect On, the other will automatically be set to Off. will not work. • WOW: Focus — To turn the vocal emphasis effect On or Off. • WOW: TruBass — To select the desired bass expansion level (High, Low, or Off ). 5. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset and press ENTER. _________ WOW, TruSurround, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. TruSurround technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. *Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby is a registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 92

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Adjusting the audio (continued) Turning off the built-in speakers Selecting the optical audio output You can use this feature to turn off the TV speakers when you format connect an audio system to your TV (see “Connecting a digital You can use this feature to select the optical audio output format audio system” and “Connecting an analog audio system” on when you connect a Dolby Digital decoder or other digital page 24). audio system to the Optical Audio Out terminal on the TV (see To turn off the built-in “Connecting a digital audio system” on page 24). speakers: To select the optical audio output format: Audio 1. Press MENU and open Audio Settings 1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu. the Audio menu. Advanced Audio Settings Audio Setup 2. Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER. 2. Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER. Audio Setup MTS Stereo Audio Language English 3. In the Speakers field, Speakers On Audio Settings Advanced Audio Settings Optical Output Format Dolby Digital select Off. Reset Done Audio Setup 4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press 3. In the Optical Output Format field, select either Dolby ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset Digital or PCM, depending on your device. and press ENTER. Audio Setup MTS Stereo To turn on the built-in speakers: Language English Speakers On Select On in step 3 above. Optical Output Format Dolby Digital Reset Done 4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset and press ENTER. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 93

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Setting the On/Off Timer Setting the sleep timer You can use the On/Off Timer to turn the TV on and off at a You can set the sleep timer to turn off the TV after a set length preset time on a recurring basis. of time (maximum of 3 hours). Note: You must first set the time (see page 55). The sleep timer turns off the TV one time only, as opposed to the On/Off Timer, which turns off the TV on a recurring basis. To set the On/Off Timer: 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. To set the sleep timer: 2. Highlight On/Off Timer and press ENTER. Press SLEEP on the remote control to set the length of time until the TV turns off. Repeatedly press SLEEP to increase the time in 10-minute increments or press y or z to increase or decrease the Setup time in 10-minute increments, to a maximum of 3 hours and 00 Installation minutes. Sleep Timer On/Off Timer PC Settings To cancel the sleep timer: HDMI 1 Audio Auto HDMI 2 Audio Auto Press SLEEP until it is set to 0. Slide Show Interval 2 Sec Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit SLEEP 3. In the DAY field, press x or • to select the recurrence (weekends, weekdays, every day, etc). On/Off Timer To set the sleep timer using the on-screen menus: Turn TV ON: 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. Day Weekends Time (HH:MM) 0 9 : 0 0 AM 2. Highlight Sleep Timer and press ENTER. TV ON Duration: 30 Minutes Reset Cancel Done Setup 4. Press z to highlight the Time field, and then use the Installation Sleep Timer Number buttons to enter the time you want the TV to On/Off Timer turn on. PC Settings HDMI 1 Audio Auto 5. When the AM/PM field is highlighted, press • to select HDMI 2 Audio Slide Show Interval Auto 2 Sec AM or PM. Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit 6. Press z to highlight the TV ON Duration field, and then press x or • to select the length of time until the TV turns 3. Press the Number buttons to enter the length of time in off (30 Minutes, 12 Hours, 8 Hours, 4 Hours, 2 Hours, 10-minute increments. 1 Hour). Sleep Timer 7. Highlight Done and press ENTER. Enter total minutes until the TV turns off automatically (Maximum 180 minutes) 8. Turn off the TV. The TV will turn on automatically on the day(s) and at the time you set. The TV will then turn off 1 2 0 automatically after the length of time you set in the Cancel Done TV ON Duration field. Note: 4. Highlight Done and press ENTER. • When a power failure occurs, the On/Off Timer settings may Note: be cleared. • When a power failure occurs, the sleep timer setting may be cleared. • To display the On/Off Timer setting, press RECALL. • To display the amount of time left on the sleep timer, press RECALL. To turn off the On/Off Timer: To display the remaining sleep time: Select Not Set in step 3 above. Press SLEEP. On/Off Timer Sleep Timer Turn TV ON: Day Not Set 1h10m Note: Reset Cancel Done A message will display on-screen when there is one minute remaining on the sleep timer. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 94

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Using the PC settings feature You can view the image from a PC on the TV screen. The PC • Horizontal Position: must be connected to the TV’s PC IN terminals. (See page 29 Moves the picture left/right. for connection details.) The adjustment range is within ±5 from center.* You can use the PC Settings feature to adjust the picture’s horizontal position/size, vertical position/size, clock phase, and • Vertical Position: sampling clock. Moves the picture up/down. Note: If a PC is not connected, this feature will be grayed out The adjustment range is within ±5 from center.* in the Input Selection screen and Setup menu. • Horizontal Width: To adjust the PC settings: Adjusts the width of the picture. 1. Repeatedly press INPUT to select “PC” input mode. (See The adjustment range is within ±5 from center.* “Selecting the video input source to view” on page 72.) • Vertical Height: 2. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. Adjusts the height of the picture. 3. Highlight PC Settings and press ENTER. The adjustment range is within ±5 from center.* • Clock Phase: Setup Helps to reduce noise and sharpen the picture. Installation The adjustment range is within ±15 from center.* Sleep Timer On/Off Timer PC Settings • Sampling Clock: HDMI 1 Audio HDMI 2 Audio Auto Auto Helps to minimize periodic vertical stripes on the screen. Slide Show Interval 2 Sec The adjustment range is within ±15 from center.* Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit ___________ *The range of adjustment may vary slightly. 4. Press y or z to highlight the item you want to adjust. 5. Press x or • to make the appropriate adjustments. PC Settings Horizontal Position 0 Horizontal Width 0 Vertical Position 0 Vertical Height 0 Clock Phase 0 Sampling Clock 0 Reset Done Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 95

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features Displaying TV setting information Understanding the auto power off on-screen using RECALL feature To display TV setting information on-screen: The TV will automatically turn itself off after approximately 15 Press RECALL on the remote control. minutes if it is tuned to a vacant channel or a station that completes its broadcast for the day. This feature functions in The following information will display on-screen (if applicable): ANT 1 and ANT 2 modes only. • Current input (ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, etc.) • If ANT 1 or ANT 2 is the current input, whether it is Cable TV (“CABLE”) or STEREO Tuner Hold: On off-air (“TV”) NC-17 Understanding the last mode • Channel number (if in On Timer: Weekdays 12:00pm ANT 1 or ANT 2 mode) Sleep Timer: 18 min. Game Timer: 28 min. memory feature ANT 1 • Signal strength indicator (bar graph in lower right Natural If the power is cut off while you are viewing the TV, the Last 1080i 5:32pm CABLE 81-1 corner of screen; for Mode Memory feature automatically turns on the TV when Sample RECALL screen the power is resupplied. ATSC signal only) Note: The signal strength indicator will react to fading and Note: You should unplug the TV’s power cord if it is possible increasing signals. that you will be away from the TV for an extended period of time • Time (if set) after the power is restored. • On/Off timer settings (if set) • Remaining time on sleep timer (if set) • Remaining time on game timer (if set) Using the Gray Level feature • Stereo or SAP audio status • V-Chip rating status The gray level feature will set the sidebars to three different • Picture size levels of darkness. Sidebars are the blanks spaces on either side of a 4:3 viewing area. • Tuner hold* (if applicable) To set the gray level of the sidebars: *If you are recording on one tuner (for example, the digital tuner), you will be able to change channels on the other tuner 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. only (the analog tuner in this example). The tuner from which 2. Highlight Gray Level and press •. you are recording is “on hold” (i.e., locked) so your recordings will not be affected by channel changes. 3. Press y or z to select your desired level of darkness • Video resolution (1 – Black, 2 – Dark Gray or 3 – Gray). • Lamp mode (appears only if the TV is in Hi Bright mode) To close the RECALL screen: Setup Press RECALL again. PC Settings HDMI 1 Audio Auto Auto 1 2 On HDMI 2 Audio Auto Auto 3 Slide Show Interval 2 Sec AVHD Skip Time 15 min Gray Level 2 Quick Restart On Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Note: • The gray level feature does not affect video being viewed in 16:9 aspect ratio. • When receiving a signal that has sidebars (e.g., 4:3 aspect ratio video over a 1080i or 720p signal), the gray level feature will not be applied to the sidebars. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 96

9 Using the Locks menu The Locks menu includes the Enable Rating Blocking, Edit Rating Limits, Channels Block, Input Lock, Front Panel Lock, Game Timer, and New PIN Code features. You can use these features after entering the correct PIN code. Entering the PIN code If you cannot remember your PIN code 1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon. While the PIN code entering screen is displayed, press RECALL four times within five seconds. The PIN code will be cleared and Locks Enable Rating Blocking Off you can enter a new PIN code. Edit Rating Limits Channels Block Input Lock Off Front Panel Lock Off Game Timer Off New PIN Code Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Changing your PIN code 2. Press z, which displays the PIN code entry screen. 1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon. • The Lock System screen (below) appears if a PIN code has 2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen. not been stored. Press the Channel Number buttons to 3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER. enter a new four-digit code, enter the code a second time to 4. Press z to highlight New PIN Code and press ENTER. confirm, and press ENTER. Lock System Locks Enable Rating Blocking Off Please enter a 4 digit PIN code Edit Rating Limits Channels Block Input Lock Off Confirm PIN code Front Panel Lock Off Game Timer Off New PIN Code Cancel Done Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit 5. Press the Number buttons to enter a new four-digit code. • The Locks/Active screen (below) appears if the PIN code is Retype the numbers to confirm the PIN code you entered. already stored. Use the Channel Number buttons to enter 6. Press ENTER. The new PIN code is now active. your four-digit code and press ENTER. New PIN Code Locks Active Please enter a 4 digit PIN code Please enter the 4 digit PIN code * * * * * * * * Confirm PIN code * * * * Cancel Done Cancel Done If the wrong PIN code is entered, the message “Incorrect PIN code, please try again!” appears. Highlight Retry and press ENTER. Enter the code again and press ENTER. When the correct PIN code is entered, the Locks menu opens. Locks Enable Rating Blocking Off Edit Rating Limits Channels Block Input Lock Off Front Panel Lock Off Game Timer Off New PIN Code Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 97

Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu Blocking TV programs and movies by rating (V-Chip) Some TV programs and movies include signals that classify the Independent rating system for broadcasters content of the program (violence, sex, dialog, language). The V-Chip feature in this TV detects the signals and blocks the Ratings Description and Content themes programs according to the ratings you select. (See the tables at TV-MA Mature Audience Only (This program is specifically designed right for rating descriptions.) to be viewed by adults and therefore may be unsuitable for children under 17.) Note: Rating blocking is a function of the V-Chip feature in this L) Crude or indecent language S) Explicit sexual activity TV, which supports the U.S. V-Chip system only. V) Graphic violence To block and unblock TV programs and movies: TV-14 Parents Strongly Cautioned (This program contains some material that many parents would find unsuitable for children 1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon. under 14 years of age.) 2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen. D) Intensely suggestive dialog L) Strong, coarse language S) Intense sexual situations V) Intense violence 3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER. TV-PG Parental Guidance Suggested (This program contains 4. Press z to highlight Enable Rating Blocking. material parents may find unsuitable for younger children.) 5. Press • and then z to select On, and then press ENTER. D) Some suggestive dialog L) Infrequent coarse language S) Some sexual situations V) Moderate violence TV-G General Audience (Most parents would find this program Locks suitable for all ages.) Enable Rating Blocking Off Off Edit Rating Limits On TV-Y7, Directed to Older Children (This program is designed Channels Block Input Lock Off TV-Y7FV for children age 7 and above. Note: Programs in which Front Panel Lock Off fantasy violence may be more intense or more combative Game Timer Off than other programs in this category are designated Y7FV.) New PIN Code TV-Y All Children (This program is designed to be appropriate for Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit all children.) 6. Press z to highlight Edit Rating Limits and press ENTER. Independent rating system for movies Locks Enable Rating Blocking Off Rating Description and content themes Edit Rating Limits Channels Block X X-rated (For adults only) Input Lock Off Front Panel Lock Off NC-17 Not intended for anyone 17 and under Game Timer Off New PIN Code R Restricted (Under 17 requires accompanying parent or adult) Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit PG-13 Parents Strongly Cautioned (Some material may be inappropriate for children under 13) The Edit Rating Limits screen (below) appears. PG Parental Guidance Suggested (Some material may not be 7. Press yzx • and then press ENTER to select the level of suitable for children) blocking you prefer. A box with an “×” is a rating that will G General Audience (Appropriate for all ages) be blocked. As you highlight a rating, a definition for the rating appears at the bottom of the screen. 8. When you are finished selecting the ratings you want to Note: block, highlight Done and press ENTER. • If you place an “X” in the box next to “ ‘None’ Rated,” programs rated “None” will be blocked; however, programs that do not provide any rating information will not be blocked. • To display the rating of the program you are watching, press RECALL on the remote control. If it is rated “None,” the word “NONE” appears in the RECALL screen (as shown below right). If rating information is not provided, no rating will appear in the RECALL screen. TV – PG L V NONE Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 98

Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu Blocking channels Unlocking programs temporarily With the Channels Block feature, you can block specific If you try to tune the TV to a program that exceeds the rating channels. You will not be able to tune blocked channels unless limits you set, the TV will enter program lock mode and the you clear the setting first. following message will appear on-screen: To block channels: 1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon. 2. Press z to display the You can either temporarily unlock the program or select an PIN code entering unlocked program to watch. Locks screen. Enable Rating Blocking Edit Rating Limits Off To temporarily unlock the program: 3. Enter your four-digit Channels Block PIN code and press Input Lock Off 1. Press MUTE. Locks Active Front Panel Lock Off ENTER (see page 97 for Game Timer Off 2. Enter your four-digit Enter PIN code to temporaily un- block. details). New PIN Code PIN code and press * * * * 4. Press z to highlight Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit ENTER. If the correct Channels Block and then press ENTER. code is entered, the Cancel Done program lock mode is 5. Using the yz x • buttons, select the input for which you released and the normal picture appears. All locking is want to change the rating limits (ANT1, ANT2, or Cable disabled until the TV is turned off, and will be enabled Box, if connected) and press ENTER. when the TV is turned on again. A list of the channels available for that input will be displayed along with the call letters for each channel, if available. Using the input lock feature 6. Press yz to highlight Channels Block ANT 1 the channel you want to 1 ANT 1 You can use the Input Lock feature to lock the video inputs block, then press 2 3 ANT 2 (VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, ColorStream HD-1, Cable Box ENTER, which puts an 4 ColorStream HD-2, HDMI 1, HDMI 2, and PC) and channels “×” in the box next to 5 3 and 4. You will not be able to view the input sources or 6 that channel. 7 Allow All channels until you unlock the inputs. 7. Repeat step 6 for other 8 Block All To lock/unlock the video inputs: 9 Cancel channels you want to 10 Done 1. Press MENU and block. highlight the Locks menu 8. Highlight Done and press ENTER. icon. Locks Enable Rating Blocking Off Off To unblock individual channels: 2. Press z to display the Edit Rating Limits Channels Block Video Video + In step 6 above, press yz to highlight the channel you want to PIN code entering screen. Input Lock Off Front Panel Lock Off unblock, and then press ENTER to remove the “X” from the 3. Enter your four-digit PIN Game Timer Off box, and then highlight Done and press ENTER. code and press ENTER. New PIN Code 4. Press z to highlight Input Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit To block all channels at once: Lock and press •. Highlight Block All in step 6 above, and then highlight Done, 5. Press y or z to select the level of video input locking you and press ENTER. prefer, as described below. To unblock all locked channels at once: 6. Press ENTER. Highlight Allow All in step 6 Channels Block ANT 1 Video: Locks VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, above, and then highlight 1 ANT 1 ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2, HDMI 1, Done and press ENTER. 2 ANT 2 HDMI 2, and PC. 3 Cable Box 4 Video+: Locks VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, 5 ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2, HDMI 1, 6 7 Allow All HDMI 2, PC, and channels 3 and 4. 8 Block All • Make sure the POP window is not on channel 3 or 4. 9 Cancel 10 Done • Select Video+ if you play video tapes via an ANT input. • When a CableCARD™ is inserted, Video+ will not lock Note: Channel blocking may not take effect if you have a cable box channels 3 and 4. connected and use the cable box controls to change channels. Off: Unlocks all video inputs and channels 3 and 4. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 99

Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu Using the GameTimer™ Using the front panel lock feature You can use the GameTimer to set a time limit for playing a You can lock the front panel touchpad controls to prevent your video game (30–120 minutes). When the GameTimer is settings from being changed accidentally (by children, for activated, the TV enters VIDEO LOCK mode and locks out example). When the front panel lock is On, none of the controls the input source for the video game device. on the TV front touchpad will operate except POWER. To set the GameTimer™: To lock the front panel: 1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon. 1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon. 2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen. 2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen. 3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER. 3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER. 4. Press z to highlight Game Timer and then press •. 4. Press z to highlight Front Panel Lock. 5. Press y or z to select the length of time until the Video 5. Press • to highlight On and press ENTER. When the front Lock is activated (30, 60, 90, or 120 minutes) and press panel is locked and any button on the touchpad (except ENTER. POWER) is pressed, the message “Not Available” appears. Locks Locks Enable Rating Blocking Off Off Enable Rating Blocking Off Off Edit Rating Limits 30 min Edit Rating Limits On Channels Block 60 min Channels Block Input Lock Off 90 min Input Lock Off Front Panel Lock Off 120 min Front Panel Lock Off Game Timer Off Game Timer Off New PIN Code New PIN Code Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit To cancel the GameTimer™: To unlock the front panel: Select Off in step 5 above. Highlight Off in step 5 above, or press and hold the To deactivate the video lock once the GameTimer has VOLUME x button on the TV front panel for about 10 activated it: seconds until the volume icon appears on-screen. Set the VIDEO LOCK to Off (see “Locking video inputs” on page 99). TV front panel touchpad Note: • A message will appear on-screen when 10 minutes, 3 minutes, and 1 minute remain on the GameTimer. • If the TV loses power with time remaining on the GameTimer, when power is restored the TV will enter VIDEO LOCK mode (as if the GameTimer had expired) and you will have to deactivate the video lock (as described above). VOLUME x Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 100

10 Using the Picture Viewer and Audio Player You can use the Picture Viewer to view compatible JPEG-format photos on your TV’s screen. Media specifications You can use the Audio Player to play compatible MP3 files on the TV. File/folder name specifications The TV can access JPEG and/or MP3 files that are stored on either a memory card (as described in this chapter) or a – Maximum file name length: 255 characters. networked PC (as described in this chapter, in Chapter 11, and – Maximum shared folder* name length: 12 characters. on page 30). Note: – File names must contain US-ASCII characters only. • Never remove a memory card or turn off the TV while – File and folder names cannot contain any special characters, viewing/playing files from a memory card. Doing so may such as \ / : ? “ ” < > | . result in loss of data and/or damage to the memory card and/or TV. SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY. • If you are viewing/playing files stored on a memory card or networked Picture Viewer/JPEG file PC, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT YOU BACK UP YOUR DATA. specifications Toshiba is not liable for any damage caused by the use of any memory card, networked PC, or shared files with this TV. Toshiba will not – Maximum JPEG file size: 8 MB compensate for any lost data or recording(s) caused by the use of • JPEG files larger than 8 MB will not display. such cards, PCs, or data. • Failure to take proper care of a memory card may prevent display of – Maximum JPEG image resolution: 6000 x 4000 pixels pictures or playback of MP3 files from the card or result in damage to • Images with a resolution higher than 6000 x 4000 pixels will the memory card and/or TV. SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED not display. BY YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY. See “Memory card care and handling” on page 106. – The Picture Viewer is designed to display only pictures stored • The technical criteria set out in this owner’s manual are meant as a in compatible JPEG formats with a file extension of “.jpg.” guide only. • You must obtain any required permission from copyright – JPEG images processed and/or edited on a personal computer owners to download or use copyrighted content. Toshiba (PC) may not display properly or at all. cannot and does not grant such permission. – Some digital cameras may store images in a format that is not compatible with the TV. – JPEG files stored on a memory card or networked PC that are not in a file and folder format compatible with the TV will not display on the TV. ___________ * The words “folder” and “directory” are used interchangeably. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 101

Chapter 10: Using the Picture Viewer and Audio Player Media specifications (continued) Audio Player/MP3 file specifications Memory card specifications – Maximum MP3 file size: 50 MB The TV is designed to read the following memory cards: • MP3 files larger than 50 MB will not play. – SD Memory Card (ver. 1.0) – The Audio Player is designed to play only music files stored – MMC (MultiMediaCard™) in compatible MP3 formats with a file extension of “.mp3.” – Memory Stick™ (Pro) – xD-Picture Card® (16MB–512MB) – MP3 files processed and/or edited on a PC may not play properly or at all. Some MP3 files may be in a format that is – CompactFlash® memory card (Type1) not compatible with the TV. Memory card format: FAT16 – MP3 files must be in the following format: • Other memory card formats (including but not limited to • MPEG1 (ISO/IEC 11172-3) Layer3. FAT32 and NTFS) are not compatible. • Sampling frequency—MPEG1: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, Maximum memory card capacity: 512 MB 48 kHz. • Bitrate—MPEG1: 32–320 kbps. Maximum number of files per memory card: • Channels—Stereo, Joint stereo, Dual channel, Single – JPEG = 1,000 channel. • All JPEG files over the 1,000th on a single memory card • ID3 Ver. 1, Ver. 2. will not display. – MP3 = 200 – The meta-data for MP3 files (e.g, artist name, album name, song title, etc.) must be in the following format: • All MP3 files over the 200th on a single memory card will not play. ISO-8859-1 (US-ASCII/ Western European) character sets – MP3 files stored on a memory card or networked PC that are not in a file and folder format compatible with the TV will not play on the TV. Networked PC specifications Maximum number of files per shared folder: – JPEG = 1,000 • All JPEG files over the 1,000th in a shared folder will not display. – MP3 = 200 • All MP3 files over the 200th in a shared folder will not play. Maximum number of nested folder levels: 10 levels • Files in folders more than 10 levels down from the top level folder will not display/play. • See Chapter 11, pages 107–112, for details on networking your TV and PC for file sharing. ______________ • The SD logo is a trademark. • MMC and MultiMediaCard are trademarks of Infineon Technologies AG and licensed to MMCA (MultiMediaCard Association). • Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation. • xD-Picture Card is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. • Toshiba is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash® and CF logo® registered trademarks. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 102

Chapter 10: Using the Picture Viewer and Audio Player Using the Picture viewer You can use the TV’s Picture Viewer to display your digital Accessing JPEG files stored on a photos (JPEG files) on your TV’s screen in thumbnail mode or as a slide show. memory card Note: 1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate card slot on the • You cannot use the Picture Viewer and Audio Player at the same time. side of your TV. Note: • You must obtain any required permission from copyright owners to download or use copyrighted • If you are using a memory card on which you stored both content. Toshiba cannot and does not grant such JPEG and MP3 files, the Picture Viewer will start permission. automatically when you insert the memory card into the TV. • Never insert more than one memory card at time. • Be sure to insert the card correctly—label side facing Accessing JPEG files stored on a left and the end with the notched corner (if applicable) inserted into the memory card slot. networked PC • When a CompactFlash memory card is inserted correctly, the ejector button pops out (see illustration below). 1. Make sure you have correctly set up your home network and file sharing (see page 30 and Chapter 11). 2. Go to “Viewing JPEG files on the TV” on the next page. 2. If a memory card is inserted in the TV, you must first close Memory card the Picture Viewer or Audio Player and then remove the VIDEO-3 IN slots { { memory card or you will not be able to view any JPEG files shared over your home network. NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THE PICTURE VIEWER OR AUDIO PLAYER BEFORE Right side of TV REMOVING THE MEMORY CARD. If you remove the memory card while viewing pictures or playing audio files, the card and/or saved data may be damaged. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY. ➔ ➔ To remove the memory card (if applicable): ➔ a) Press EXIT to close the Picture Viewer, Audio Player, or any other application that may be running. b) For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector CompactFlash button and then pull the card straight out from the ejector button ➔ TV. ➔ For all other memory cards, pull the card straight out or from the TV. or 3. Press MENU and open the Applications menu. CompactFlash 4. Highlight Picture Viewer and press ENTER. xD-Picture Card MMC memory card (MultiMediaCard) 5. Go to “Viewing JPEG files on the TV” on the next page. ™ Secure Digital or SD Memory Stick (Secure Digital) memory card Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 103

Chapter 10: Using the Picture Viewer and Audio Player Using the Picture viewer (continued) Viewing JPEG files on the TV 1. After accessing your JPEG files from your memory card or To set the slide show interval: networked PC (see previous page), the images automatically 1. Press EXIT to close the Picture Viewer (if it is open). display on-screen, with one as a large picture and six in thumbnail format. 2. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. Picture Viewer 3. Highlight Slide Show Interval and press ENTER. 1 of 6 May 28 04 2 of 6 4. Select the interval from the menu sidebar (2, 5, 10, 15, or Jan 8 04 3 of 6 20 seconds). Jan 18 04 4 of 6 May 12 04 5 of 6 Sep 18 03 6 of 6 Setup Oct 10 10 Installation 2 sec Rotate Next Slide Show EXIT Exit Sleep Timer 5 sec On/Off Timer 10 sec 2. Press x to rotate the large picture 90° counterclockwise. PC Settings HDMI 1 Audio Auto 15 sec 20 sec Picture Viewer HDMI 2 Audio Auto 1 of 6 Slide Show Interval 2 Sec May 28 04 2 of 6 Jan 8 04 Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit 3 of 6 Jan 18 04 4 of 6 May 12 04 5 of 6 Sep 18 03 To close the Picture Viewer: 6 of 6 Rotate Next Slide Show Oct 10 10 EXIT Exit Press EXIT to close the Picture Viewer and return to the regular TV screen. 3. Press • to rotate the large picture 90° clockwise. Picture Viewer To restart the Picture Viewer while the memory 1 of 6 May 28 04 2 of 6 card is still inserted: Jan 8 04 3 of 6 Jan 18 04 1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu. 4 of 6 May 12 04 5 of 6 2. Highlight Picture Viewer and press ENTER. Sep 18 03 6 of 6 Oct 10 10 Rotate Next Slide Show EXIT Exit Applications 4. Press y or z to select another picture as the large picture. TV Guide On Screen Audio Player 5. Press ENTER to view your pictures in a slide show. Picture Viewer Digital CC/Audio Selector CableCARD 3. Follow the steps under “Viewing JPEG files on the TV,” above. To close the Picture Viewer and remove the memory card: During the slide show: 1. Press EXIT to close the Picture Viewer and return to the regular TV screen. • To stop on an image during the slide show, press ENTER. To resume the slide show, press ENTER again. NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THE PICTURE • To rotate the picture, press x or •, and then press ENTER. VIEWER BEFORE REMOVING THE MEMORY CARD. • To select another image, press y or z, and then press If you remove the memory card while viewing pictures, the card ENTER. and/or saved data may be damaged. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE • To stop the slide show and return to the picture viewer, IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY. press CH RTN. 2. For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector button • To stop the slide show and return to the regular TV screen, and then pull the card straight out from the TV. press EXIT. For all other memory cards, pull the card straight out from the TV. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 104

Chapter 10: Using the Picture Viewer and Audio Player Using the Audio Player You can use the TV’s Audio Player to listen to MP3 files on Accessing MP3 files stored on the TV. Note: a memory card • Make all desired adjustments to the TV’s audio features Note: (e.g., surround, bass, treble, balance) before starting the • Never insert more than one memory card at a time. Audio Player. • Be sure to insert the card correctly—label side facing • You cannot use the Picture Viewer and Audio Player at the left and the end with the notched corner (if applicable) same time. inserted into the memory card slot. • You must obtain any required permission from • When a CompactFlash memory card is inserted correctly, the copyright owners to download or use copyrighted ejector button will pop out (see page 103). content. Toshiba cannot and does not grant such permission. For a memory card that is already inserted in the TV: 1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu. Accessing MP3 files stored on a 2. Highlight Audio Player and press ENTER. networked PC 1. Make sure you have correctly set up your home network Applications and file sharing (see page 30 and Chapter 11). TV Guide On Screen Audio Player Picture Viewer 2. If a memory card is inserted in the TV, you must first close Digital CC/Audio Selector the Audio Player or Picture Viewer and then remove the CableCARD memory card or you will not be able to play any networked MP3 files. 3. Go to “Playing MP3 audio files on the TV” on the next page. NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THE PICTURE VIEWER OR AUDIO PLAYER BEFORE For a memory card that contains both MP3 files REMOVING THE MEMORY CARD. and JPEG files when no memory card is inserted If you remove the memory card while viewing pictures or playing in the TV: audio files, the card and/or saved data may be damaged. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR 1. Insert the memory card into the applicable memory card TOSHIBA WARRANTY. slot on the side of your TV (see page 103 for details). 2. The Picture Viewer will start automatically (by default). To remove the memory card (if applicable): Press EXIT to close the Picture Viewer. a) Press EXIT to close the Audio Player, Picture Viewer, 3. Press MENU and open the Applications menu. or any other application that may be running. 4. Highlight Audio Player b) For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector and press ENTER. button and then pull the card straight out from Applications the TV. 5. Go to “Playing MP3 TV Guide On Screen audio files on the TV” Audio Player For all other memory cards, pull the card straight out Picture Viewer on the next page. from the TV. Digital CC/Audio Selector CableCARD 3. Press MENU and open For a memory card the Applications menu. that contains only Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Applications 4. Highlight Audio Player TV Guide On Screen MP3 files Audio Player and press ENTER. Picture Viewer when no memory card is inserted in the TV: Digital CC/Audio Selector 5. Go to “Playing MP3 CableCARD 1. Insert the memory card into the applicable memory card audio files on the TV” slot on the side of your TV (see page 103 for details). The on the next page. Audio Player starts automatically. Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit 2. Go to “Playing MP3 audio files on the TV” on the next page. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 105

Chapter 10: Using the Picture Viewer and Audio Player Using the Audio Player (continued) Playing MP3 audio files on the TV 1. After accessing your MP3 files from your memory card or To close the Audio Player and remove the networked PC (see previous page), the Audio Player will memory card: begin playing the first MP3 file in the list. 1. Press EXIT to close the Audio Player and return to the Audio Player regular TV screen. Title Artist Ser No.1 in D, Op.11... SCO/Sir Charles... Vol Requiem, Op. 5: IV. R... Robert Shaw/Atla... NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THE PICTURE Rapsodie Espagnole:... Jesus Lopez-Cobo... Moolight Sonata, movement III. Sanctus: Sanctu... Boston Baroque/M... VIEWER OR AUDIO PLAYER BEFORE A-M Classical Piano Sonata, K. 545... Pathétique Sonata, m... A-M Classical A-M Classical REMOVING THE MEMORY CARD. Chopin Prelude No. ... Andrys If you remove the memory card while viewing pictures or playing Piano Sonata, K. 545... A-M Classical Moolight Sonata, mo... A-M Classical audio files, the card and/or saved data may be damaged. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR Navigate Select EXIT Exit TOSHIBA WARRANTY. 2. Press yz x • to navigate to the rewind, pause, fast 2. For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector button forward, skip backward, skip forward, volume, and mute and then pull the card straight out from the TV. buttons—or to select another MP3 file—and then press For all other memory cards, pull the card straight out from ENTER. the TV. Note: After 30 seconds of inactivity, a screen saver will appear. To start the screen saver immediately, press any button on the remote control. Memory card care and handling To use the mute function: Press yz x • to select the (mute) button, and then press • Use index labels made exclusively for your specific brand of ENTER. See page 90 for details on muting the sound. memory card. Do not use commercially sold labels, which can cause a malfunction when the card is inserted or ejected. To start the MP3 audio player when a memory card is already inserted: • If the image does not appear correctly, or the audio file does not play correctly, clean the metallic area of the memory 1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu. card using a soft, dry, lint-free, anti-static cloth, and then 2. Highlight Audio Player and press ENTER. reinsert the card. 3. Press yz x • to navigate to the rewind, pause, fast • Prevent the metallic area on the memory card from coming forward, skip backward, skip forward, volume, and mute in contact with dust, dirt, or other foreign particles. Do not buttons, and then press ENTER. touch the metallic area of the memory card with your hands or otherwise handle it with anything other than a soft, dry, To close the Audio Player: lint-free, anti-static cloth. Press EXIT to close the Audio Player and return to the regular Note: Toshiba is not liable for any damage caused by the use of any memory card with this TV. Toshiba TV screen. will not compensate for any lost data or recordings caused by the use of such cards. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 106

11 Using the THINC™ home network feature The Toshiba Home Interactive Network Connection (THINC™) feature allows you to connect the TV to your home network, which will enable access to the file sharing and e-mail scheduling features. • File sharing You can access JPEG and MP3 files that are stored on your networked home PC and view/play them on the TV. Note: Requires a home network* (see page 30). Does NOT require Internet/e-mail service. • E-mail scheduling of recordings and reminders You can schedule recordings and reminders by sending an e-mail to the TV from any PC. Note: • Requires a compatible recording device (see chapter 2); a home network* (see page 30); and home Internet service with a dedicated POP3 e-mail address for the TV (different from your personal e-mail address). Contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to obtain and set up Internet/e-mail service. • You will NOT be able to access or browse the Internet through the TV. * The THINC™ home network feature is compatible only with Microsoft® Windows® 2000 and the Home and Professional versions of Microsoft® Windows® XP Service Pack 1 and Service Pack 2. Follow the steps in sections A through D (below through page 112) to set up and use the TV’s home network features. A. Connect the TV to your B. Set up the network address home network To set up the network address: 1. First, try automatically setting up the network address 1. Connect the TV to your home network via the TV’s (below). RJ-45 (Ethernet) port. See page 30 for connection instructions. 2. If the automatic setup is not successful, you can either retry the automatic setup (below) or try manually setting up the 2. If you want to use file sharing only and do not have network address (page 108). Internet service in your home: Skip to section B, “Set up the network address,” Automatically setting up the at right. Note: If you do not have Internet service, you will not be network address able to use the e-mail scheduling feature. 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. If you want to use file sharing and e-mail Network scheduling: 2. Highlight Installation Basic Network Setup E-mail Scheduling Setup and press ENTER. The Home File Server Setup a) You must have Internet service in your home and a Installation menu dedicated e-mail address for the TV (different from your appears. personal e-mail address). Contact your ISP to obtain and set up Internet/e-mail service in your home. 3. Open the Network Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit menu. b)After you have obtained Internet/e-mail service in your 4. Highlight Basic Network Setup and press ENTER. home (from your ISP), go to section B, “Set up the network address,” at right. Router technology, like all new and emerging technology, may For home networktroubleshooting tips, see Chapter 12. from time to time cause compatibility issues because of the differences in router systems implemented by the various router manufacturers; The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television however, most issues can be easily resolved. If you think your Toshiba programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under TV and router might have compatibility problems, please contact the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may Toshiba Consumer Solutions by calling 1-800-631-3811 or by visiting subject you to civil and criminal liability. http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp. ___________ Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and /or other countries. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 107

Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature B. Set up the network address (continued) 5. The message “Obtain network address automatically?” will 9. If, after repeating steps 1–6, you receive the error display. Highlight Yes and press ENTER. message shown in step 8: Basic Network Setup Either… Obtain network address automatically? a) Highlight “OK” and press ENTER. b) Go to “Manually setting up the network address,” Yes No below. 6. The message “Please wait…” will display while the TV is Or… attempting to load the network address information from a) Highlight “OK” and press ENTER. the DHCP server. b) Continue to sections C, D, and E on pages 110–112 Basic Network Setup (to set up and use file sharing) and/or to sections F Please wait... and G on pages 113 (to set up and use e-mail scheduling). If the file sharing and/or e-mail scheduling features work correctly, then the automatic network address If the automatic network address setup is successful, setup was successful (even though the TV displayed the go to step 7. error message). If the automatic network address setup is not successful, If the file sharing and/or e-mail scheduling features go to step 8. do not work correctly, go to “Manually setting up the 7. If the automatic network address setup is successful, the network address,” below. following screen will appear: Basic Network Setup Done! Network address information has been found! OK Manually setting up the network address a) Press ENTER to close the screen and return to the Network menu. This setup requires the data listed below. You can get this data from either your ISP or the configuration utility for your b) Skip to section C, “Set up file sharing on your PC,” DSL/cable modem or router. on page 110. 8. If the automatic network address setup is not successful, IP address: the following screen will appear: ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ Subnet mask: ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ Gateway (Router) address: ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ DNS (Domain Name Server) address: a) Make sure all cables for your home network are securely connected. ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ b) Make sure your home network is set up properly. See page 30 for TV connection information. 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. Also consult the owner’s manuals for your other 2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. The Installation components. menu appears. c) Make sure the DHCP and security settings on your home router are correct. Consult the owner’s manual 3. Open the Network Network for your router. menu. Basic Network Setup E-mail Scheduling Setup d) Retry the automatic network address setup by following 4. Highlight Basic Home File Server Setup these steps: Network Setup and (1) Highlight OK and press ENTER. press ENTER. Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit (2) Repeat steps 1–6. (If you have already repeated this setup process, go to step 9.) Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 108

Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature B. Set up the network address (continued) Manually setting up the network Resetting the network address address (continued) 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. 5. The message “Obtain network address automatically?” appears. 2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. The Installation menu appears. Highlight No and press ENTER. 3. Open the Network menu. Basic Network Setup 4. Highlight Basic Network Setup and press ENTER. Obtain network address automatically? 5. The message “Your Basic Network Setup is complete. Yes No Would you like to start over?” will appear. To continue, highlight Yes and press ENTER. 6. The Basic Network Setup menu appears. To return to the Network menu, highlight No and press Press y or z to highlight the IP address field, and then use ENTER. the Number buttons on the remote control to input the IP address. Basic Network Setup Please enter your Network Address Information IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway(Router) DNS(Domain Name Saver) 6. If you selected Yes in step 5, the message “Obtain network Cancel Done address automatically?” will appear. Basic Network Setup 7. Press z to highlight the Subnet Mask field, and then use Obtain network address automatically? the Number buttons to input the Subnet Mask. Yes No 8. Press z to highlight the Gateway (Router) field, and then use the Number buttons to input the Gateway (Router) To obtain the network address automatically, go to step 5 address. under “Automatically setting up the network address” on page 108. 9. Press z to highlight the DNS (Domain Name Server) field, To manually enter the network address, go to “Manually and then use the Number buttons to input the Gateway setting up the network address” on page 108. (Router) address. 10. When finished, highlight Done and press ENTER. The Basic Network Setup menu closes and the Network menu appears. For home networktroubleshooting tips, see Chapter 12. 11. Go to section C, “Set up file sharing on your PC,” on page 110. Note: • If you used an Ethernet crossover cable to connect your PC directly to the TV, you will not be able to use the automatic setup, and must manually set up the network address. • If you used a hub or switch to connect the TV to your home network, you will not be able to use the automatic setup, and must manually set up the network address. • If you used a router with built-in DHCP functionality, use the automatic setup. Manual setup may not work. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 109

Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature C. Set up file sharing on your PC Compatible operating systems The following operating systems are compatible for file sharing 2. In the Properties window for the selected folder: with the TV: a) Click to display • Microsoft® Windows® XP Service Pack 2 the “Sharing” tab. (Home Edition and Professional) [See setup details below] • Microsoft® Windows® XP Service Pack 1 (Home Edition and Professional) [See setup details below] b) Click to select “Share this folder.” • Microsoft® Windows® 2000 [See setup details on next page] No other operating systems are compatible with the TV. Note: c) Click “Permissions” • The name of any directory/folder on your PC that you are (which will open setting up for file sharing with the TV can have a maximum of the Permissions 12 characters and cannot contain any special characters. window for the • See “Media specifications” on pages 101–102 for selected folder. details on compatible JPEG and MP3 files. Note: If the “Sharing” tab on your specific PC looks like the one illustrated To determine which operating system and below (with no “Permissions” button), follow the steps below. When you click “OK,” you are finished setting up file sharing on your PC and can service pack (if applicable) are on your PC: proceed to section D. 1. On your PC, click the “Start” button. a) Click to display 2. Click “Settings | Control Panel.” the “Sharing” tab. 3. In the Control Panel, double-click “System.” 4. Select the “General” tab, which will display your PC’s b) Click to select current operating system and service pack. “Share this folder on the network.” Setting up file sharing on a PC c) Click “OK” (which will close the with Microsoft® Windows® XP Permissions window for the selected folder. Service Pack 1 or Service Pack 2 1. On your PC: 3. In the Permissions window for the selected folder: a) Click “Add...” a) Right-click and then select the the folder user to be given to be shared. sharing privileges.* *This user must match the user stored in the TV’s “Home File Server b) Click “Sharing Setup” menu. and Security...” b) Click to check (which will open “Allow” next to  the Properties  “Full Control.”  window for the selected folder. c) Click “Apply.” d) Click “OK” ___________ to close the window. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft 4. Go to section D, “Set up file sharing on the TV.” Corporation. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 110

Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature C. Set up file sharing on your PC (continued) Setting up file sharing on a PC with Microsoft® Windows® 2000 1. On your PC: 4. In the Properties window: a) Right-click the folder to be shared. b) Click “Sharing...” (which will open the Properties window for the Click “OK” selected folder. (which closes the Properties window). 2. In the Properties window for the selected folder: 5. The shared folder will display with a “shared folder” icon (a hand holding a folder). a) Click to display the “Sharing” tab. b) Click to select “Share this folder.” c) Click “Permissions” (which will open the Permissions window for the selected folder). 3. In the Permissions window for the selected folder: 6. Go to section D, “Set up file sharing on the TV” on page 112. a) Click “Add...” and then select the user to be given sharing privileges.* For home networktroubleshooting tips, see Chapter 12. *This user must match the user stored in the TV’s “Home File Server Setup” menu. b) Click to check “Allow” next to “Full Control.” c) Click “Apply.” d) Click “OK” (which closes the Permissions window). Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 111

Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature D. Set up file sharing on the TV 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. 7. Press yz to highlight either JPEG Picture Directory or MP3 Music Directory. 2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. The Installation menu will appear. Note: The first time you highlight either of these fields, the message “Please Wait...” will appear on-screen until the field is Open the Network menu. populated with the files in your PC’s shared folder(s). Home File Server Setup Please Wait... Please enter your Home File Server Setup information. Network Home Server Name ABCD Basic Network Setup User Name XYZ E-mail Scheduling Setup Password ***** Home File Server Setup JPEG Picture Directory –– MP3 Music Directory –– Cancel Done Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit 8. Press x • to select the shared folder (on your PC) that 3. Highlight Home File Server Setup and press ENTER. The contains the JPEG and/or MP3 files you want to view/play Home File Server Setup window will appear. on the TV. After a few moments, the message “Please Wait...” will Note: Make sure you select the correct folder in this step. appear until the network finds your networked PC. 9. To exit the window and save your settings, highlight Done The networked PC will act as the “Home Server” for file and press ENTER. sharing with the TV. Home File Server Setup To exit the window without saving your settings, highlight Please enter your Home File Server Setup information. Cancel and press ENTER. Home Server Name ABCD User Name XYZ Password ***** JPEG Picture Directory MP3 Music Directory JPEG MP3 E. Viewing/playing shared files Cancel Done on the TV 4. Press yz to highlight Home Server Name, and then press See Chapter 10, “Using the Picture Viewer and Audio Player,” x • to select the name of the PC you set up for file for details on viewing/playing your shared JPEG and MP3 files sharing. on the TV. If you have multiple PCs on your home network that have shared folders, press x • to select the PC (home server) from which you want to access files. USING THE ON-SCREEN KEYBOARD Home File Server Setup Please enter your Home File Server Setup information. a. Press yzx • to highlight the desired letter, number, or Home Server Name User Name ABCD XYZ character, and then Password ***** press ENTER. [email protected]_ JPEG Picture Directory JPEG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = MP3 Music Directory MP3 b. Repeat step “a” until q w e r t y u i o p [ ] a s d f g h j k l ; ' Cancel Done you have finished z x c v b n m , . / Shift BS entering all characters Done Clear Cancel 5. a. Press yz to highlight User Name and then press for the selected field. ENTER to open the on-screen keyboard for that field. Note: • To toggle between uppercase and lowercase letters and b. Enter the User Name for your PC using the on-screen between numbers and symbols, highlight Shift and press keyboard. See “Using the on-screen keyboard,” ENTER. at right. • To erase the last entered character, highlight BS Note: The User Name is case sensitive. (backspace) and press ENTER. c. When finished entering all characters, highlight Done • To clear your entered characters, highlight Clear and press ENTER. and press ENTER. 6. Repeat step 5 for the Password field. c. When you are finished entering all characters for the selected field, highlight Done and press ENTER. Note: The Password is case sensitive. You will return to the previous Setup window. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 112

Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature F. Set up e-mail scheduling You can remotely schedule and delete recordings and reminders Setting up e-mail scheduling via e-mail to the TV from any PC. Note: 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. • If you have not already done so, follow the instructions in 2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. The Installation sections A and B , pages 107–109, before proceeding. menu appears. • Before you can schedule recordings, the time and date in the TV Guide On Screen feature must be set. See “Setting the 3. Open the Network menu. time and date” on page 55. 4. Highlight E-mail Scheduling Setup and press ENTER. The E-mail Scheduling Setup window opens. Required information and services E-mail Scheduling Setup Please enter your E-mail Setup Information. Before you can set up the e-mail scheduling feature, you must E-mail Scheduling On ID Required On have the following information and related services: ID XXXXXXXXXXXX E-mail Address a) A valid POP3 e-mail address dedicated for use by the TV Account only. Password Incoming Mail Server Outgoing Mail Server Note: The e-mail address assigned to the TV must be a E-mail Authorization On dedicated POP3 address, different from your personal Authorized E-mail Enter YOUR E-mail here e-mail address. Assigning your personal e-mail address Test cancel Done to the TV will eventually lead to the deletion of all of your personal e-mails (including attachments). This is NOT covered under the Toshiba warranty. 5. Enter the required data in the fields. b) A personal e-mail address (different from the TV’s See “Description of fields in the E-mail Scheduling Setup dedicated e-mail address) from which you can send e-mails window” on page 115 for details on the settings for these to the TV. fields. c) Login and password settings for the TV’s POP3 e-mail • For the fields listed below, press y or z to highlight the account. field, and then press x or • to select On or Off: d) Name or IP address of the incoming (POP3) mail server. – E-mail Scheduling e) Name or IP address of the outgoing (SMTP) mail server. – ID Required To obtain the required e-mail services listed above, contact – E-mail Authorization your ISP. • For the fields listed below, press y or z to highlight the To obtain the required addresses and settings listed above, field, press ENTER to E-mail Address either contact your ISP or use the configuration utility for open the keyboard your DSL/cable modem or router. window for the [email protected]_ selected field, and then 1 q 2 w 3 e 4 r 5 t 6 y 7 u 8 i 9 o 0 p - [ = ] Note: enter the required a s d f g h j k l ; ' • Toshiba is not responsible for any damage or loss caused information using the z Shift x c v b n m , . BS / directly or indirectly by the failure of the e-mail scheduling Done Clear Cancel on-screen keyboard: feature to record content intended to be recorded. • Toshiba is not responsible for, nor has any control over, – ID any content recorded and/or viewed using the e-mail – E-mail Address scheduling feature. Further, the e-mail scheduling feature – Account is not meant to be used for unauthorized recording and/or viewing of copyrighted works. – Password • The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision – Incoming Mail Server of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other – Outgoing Mail Server materials is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you – Authorized E-mail to civil and criminal liability. See “USING THE ON-SCREEN KEYBOARD” on page 112 for instructions on entering data in the fields using the on-screen keyboard. For home networktroubleshooting tips, see Chapter 12. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 113

Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature F. Set up e-mail scheduling (continued) 6. When you are finished entering all characters for the If the e-mail test does not pass: selected field, highlight Done and press ENTER. a. An error message and You will return to the E-mail Scheduling Setup code will appear E-mail Scheduling Please enter your E-mail Setup Information. E-mail Scheduling On on-screen (similar to Setup window. ID Required On the example at right). ID XXXXXXXXXXXX 7. Highlight Test and E-mail Address Note: The first number in Account the error code denotes an press ENTER to test Password Incoming Mail Server error that occurs when the the e-mail setup. Outgoing Mail Server TV is receiving an e-mail; E-mail Authorization On During testing, the Authorized E-mail Enter YOUR E-mail here the second number denotes an error that occurs when the TV is TV will display the Test cancel Done sending an e-mail. message “Testing E-mail.” b. Locate the error code in the “‘TESTING E-MAIL’ Note: Depending on your configuration, the e-mail test can ERROR CODES” table (below) and try the solutions. take several minutes. Do not press EXIT during this time. c. Repeat steps 1–8. 8. When testing is finished, a message will appear indicating 9. To exit the E-mail Scheduling Setup window and save your whether the e-mail test passed or not. settings, highlight Done and press ENTER. E-mail Scheduling Setup If the e-mail test Please enter your E-mail Setup Information. E-mail Scheduling On To exit the E-mail Scheduling Setup window without saving passes: ID Required On your settings, highlight Cancel and press ENTER. ID XXXXXXXXXXXX a. The “Test Passes” E-mail Address Testing E-mail Account message (shown at Password Test Passes OK IMPORTANT NOTE Incoming Mail Server right) will appear. Outgoing Mail Server To use e-mail scheduling, you must first set up the TV Guide E-mail Authorization On On Screen® system. E-mail scheduling will not be available unless the b. Go to step 9. Authorized E-mail Enter YOUR E-mail here TV Guide On Screen® system is fully operational. See Chapter 5 for Test cancel Done details on setting up the TV Guide On Screen system. If you experience any issues with e-mail scheduling, please contact Toshiba Consumer Solutions by calling 1-800-631-3811 or by visiting For home networktroubleshooting tips, see Chapter 12. http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp. “TESTING E-MAIL” ERROR CODES Code Description Solutions –1 The TV was able to connect to the • If you receive the message “Error Sending Mail (–1),” the TV may not have received the test e-mail. Send e-mail server(s) but not log on. another test e-mail to the TV using the “HELP request e-mail” format (see page 118). • Make sure the TV Guide On Screen® system was set up properly. See “IMPORTANT NOTE,” above. • Make sure you entered the correct information for the following fields in the TV’s “E-mail Scheduling Setup” window (confirm this information with your ISP): – “Incoming Mail Server” and “Outgoing Mail Server” names (or IP addresses). – “Account” (user name) and “Password” for the TV’s e-mail account. – “E-mail Address” for the TV. • Check with your ISP to make sure your TV’s e-mail account has been activated. • Check with your ISP to make sure their servers support POP3 and SMTP protocols without secure password authentication or secure connections. 27 The TV could not resolve the e-mail • Make sure you entered the correct information for the following fields in the TV’s “E-mail Scheduling Setup” server name(s)/address(es). window (confirm this information with your ISP): – “Incoming Mail Server” and “Outgoing Mail Server” names (or IP addresses). – “IP,” “Netmask,” “Gateway,” and “DNS” settings (applicable if you manually set up the network address). • Make sure all cables are connected properly and securely. • Check your router hardware/settings to make sure your Internet service is currently available (especially if the e-mail test takes several minutes to complete). 30 The e-mail server name(s)/address(es) • Make sure you entered the correct information for the following fields in the TV’s “E-mail Scheduling Setup” were resolved but the TV could not window (confirm this information with your ISP): connect to the server(s). – “Incoming Mail Server” and “Outgoing Mail Server” names (or IP addresses). – “IP,” “Netmask,” “Gateway,” and “DNS” settings (applicable if you manually set up the network address). • Make sure all cables are connected properly and securely. • Check your router hardware/settings to make sure your Internet service is currently available. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 114

Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature F. Set up e-mail scheduling (continued) Description of fields in the “E-mail Scheduling Setup” window For instructions on entering data in these fields, see step 5 under “Setting up e-mail scheduling” on page 113. ■“E-mail Scheduling” field ■“ID” field E-mail Scheduling Setup Please enter your E-mail Setup Information. E-mail Scheduling On You can select On or Off for the “E-mail Scheduling” field. Use the on-screen ID Required On – When this field is set to On, it will be possible for the TV keyboard to enter six ID E-mail Address XXXXXXXXXXXX to receive e-mails from any PC to remotely schedule and to 16 numbers and/or Account Password modify recordings and reminders. letters to create your Incoming Mail Server ID (spaces and Outgoing Mail Server – When this field is set to Off, it will not be possible for the punctuation are not E-mail Authorization Authorized E-mail On Enter YOUR E-mail here TV to receive any e-mail, the other fields in this window allowed). Test cancel Done will be disabled (“grayed out”), and it will not be possible to remotely schedule recordings or reminders via e-mail. Also see the “Security settings” table, below. Note: Also see the “Security settings” table, below. • To help protect your privacy, you may want to choose an ID that is different from any of your usual passwords or security ■“ID Required” field PINs (e.g., different from your personal e-mail password, banking login code, social security number, etc.). You can select On or Off for the “ID Required” field. • The ID is case sensitive. – When this field is set to On (recommended), you must include the ID that you enter in the “ID” field in all e-mails you send to the TV. This is a security feature to protect your ■“E-mail Address” field TV from unauthorized e-mail access. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the TV’s dedicated e-mail – When this field is set to Off, you do not need to include address (different from your personal e-mail address). You will the ID in e-mails you send to the TV. send e-mails to this address to add, modify, or delete schedules Also see the “Security settings” table, below. and reminders. Security settings (Results of various setting combinations when the “E-mail Scheduling” field is set to ON in the “E-mail Scheduling Setup” window) “E-mail “E-mail “Authorized “ID Level of Scheduling” Authorization” E-mail” Required” “ID” Result security field field field field field High* ON ON Enter single ON Enter The TV will only accept e-mails from the one e-mail address [default settings] E-mail address ID specified in the “Authorized E-mail” field that also include the (Recommended) “ID” in the body of the e-mail. All other e-mails received by the TV (except GET and HELP commands) will be deleted. Medium ON ON Enter single OFF — The TV will only accept e-mails from the one e-mail address E-mail address specified in the “Authorized E-mail” field. All other e-mails received by the TV will be deleted. Low ON OFF — ON Enter The TV will accept e-mails from any e-mail address that ID includes the “ID” in the body of the e-mail. All other e-mails received by the TV will be deleted. None ON OFF — OFF — The TV will accept e-mails from any e-mail address (including (Not recommended) unwanted e-mails, such as spam) and will reply to those e-mails with a failure acknowledgment. *The “High” settings are the default settings. To help prevent the TV from receiving or sending unwanted e-mails (including e-mails that contain information about the programs the TV is set to record), it is recommended that you not change these settings unless you need to diagnose a problem or deal with a unique user situation. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 115

Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature F. Set up e-mail scheduling (continued) Description of fields in the “E-mail Scheduling Setup” window (continued) ■“Account” field ■“E-mail Authorization” field Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the TV’s e-mail account You can select On or Off for the “E-mail Authorization” field. login. Depending on your ISP, this may be the entire e-mail – When this field is set to On (recommended), the TV will address or just the characters in the e-mail address before the only accept e-mails from the e-mail address you specify in “@” sign. the “Authorized E-mail” field (e.g., your personal e-mail address). The TV will delete any e-mails not sent from this ■“Password” field authorized e-mail address. This is a security feature to protect the TV from Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the password for the TV’s unauthorized e-mail access and from replying to unwanted e-mail account. e-mail, such as spam. Note: To help protect your other personal Internet or e-mail accounts, create a password that is significantly different from any of your usual – When this field is set to Off, it will be possible for the TV passwords and security PINs (e.g., different from your e-mail to accept e-mails from any e-mail address (depending on password, banking log-ons, social security code etc.). the other settings in the “E-mail Scheduling Setup” window). ■“Incoming Mail Server” field Also see the “Security settings” table on page 115. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the incoming (POP3) mail server that hosts the TV’s e-mail account. ■“Authorized E-mail” field Note: The TV does not support encrypted e-mail. Enter the single e-mail address that is authorized to send e-mails to the TV (e.g., your personal e-mail address). – To enable this field, you must set the “E-mail ■“Outgoing Mail Server” field Authorization” field to On. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the outgoing (SMTP) – This field can be left blank if you have the “E-mail mail server associated with the TV’s e-mail account. (The TV Authorization” field set to Off. will use this server for sending reply e-mails to your personal e-mail account.) Also see the “Security settings” table on page 115. For home networktroubleshooting tips, see Chapter 12. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 116

Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature G. Using e-mail scheduling You can use the e-mail scheduling feature to schedule and delete Sending a request e-mail to the TV recordings and reminders by sending a “request e-mail” to the TV’s e-mail address from any PC. To send a request e-mail to the TV: The four commands the TV will accept are ADD, DELETE, 1. Format the e-mail according to the instructions under GET, and HELP, as described in this section. “Formatting a request e-mail” below. If you have not already done so, follow the instructions in 2. Send the e-mail to the TV. sections A and B , pages 107–109, and in section F, pages 3. After the TV receives and processes the e-mail, the TV will 113–116, before proceeding. send a reply e-mail to your PC indicating whether the e-mailed request succeeded or failed. See “Receiving an When a recording is scheduled via e-mail, the recording device e-mail from the TV” on page 119. used will be the first of the following attached devices found by the network (in this order): 1) an AVHD recorder connected to one of the TV’s Formatting a request e-mail IEEE1394 ports (see page 26); or Recognized tags 2) a D-VHS recorder connected to one of the TV’s IEEE1394 When you send an ADD, DELETE, GET, or HELP request ports (see page 26); or e-mail to the TV, the TV will recognize only the tags listed below. These tags (and their accompanying data) must be listed 3) a VCR connected to the TV’s analog A/V OUT terminals in the body of the request e-mail in the following order: (see item 4 on page 11 for the location of the A/V OUT terminals; see Chapter 2 for various VCR connection ID* Your ID (required only if you set the “ID Required” field to On*) examples). COMMAND ADD —or— DELETE —or— GET —or— HELP INPUT ANT-1 —or— ANT-2 —or— CABLE BOX E-mail parameters CHANNEL Channel number of the recording or reminder DATE Date of the recording or reminder • The maximum allowable e-mail size is 16 KB. E-mails over START TIME Start time of the recording or reminder 16 KB will be automatically deleted. DURATION Length of time of the recording or reminder • E-mails sent to the TV cannot contain any attachments. TYPE RECORD —or— REMIND The TV will automatically delete any e-mail with an attached file. • E-mails can be formatted either Plain Text or Rich Text Tag and data formats Format (HTML style). The data for each tag can be formatted in various ways, as • E-mails sent to the TV that are not properly formatted, described in the following table: are from the wrong e-mail address, or have the wrong ID Tag formats Data formats (if specified) will be deleted. ID* [6- to 16-character alphanumeric code] • All e-mails sent to the TV will be deleted eventually. MyID1234 … MYID1234 … myid1234 COMMAND ADD Note: CMD DELETE … DEL • Toshiba is not responsible for any damage or loss caused directly GET or indirectly by the failure of the e-mail scheduling feature to record HELP content intended to be recorded. INPUT ANT1 … ANT-1 … Antenna-1 • Toshiba is not responsible for, nor has any control over, any content INP ANT2 … ANT-2 … Antenna-2 recorded and/or viewed using the e-mail scheduling feature. CABLE BOX … cablebox … CB Further, the e-mail scheduling feature is not meant to be used SET-TOP BOX … settopbox … STB for unauthorized recording and/or viewing of copyrighted works. • The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of CHANNEL For cable channels: 4 … 38 … 100 television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is CH For digital channels, use a hyphen: 5-1 … 102-2 prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and DATE [If the year is not specified, the current year is assumed.] other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. 7-4 … 7/23 … 7-16-05 … 12/4/05 … 12/19/2005 START TIME 8am … 4:45pm … 8:30AM … 9PM _____________ START Noon: 12:00pm … Midnight: 12:00am * The ID is case sensitive. The ID tag is required only if you created an ID in the DURATION 15m … 15min … 15minutes … 2h … 2hr … “ID” field and set the “ID Required” field to On. If you set the “ID Required” field to Off, you do not need to include the ID tag line in your request e-mail. DUR 2h15m … 2hr15min … 2:15 See “Description of fields in the E-mail Scheduling Setup window” on pages TYPE RECORD … REC … Rec … recording 115–116. REMIND … REM … Rem … reminder Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 117

Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature G. Using e-mail scheduling (continued) Formatting a request e-mail (continued) Sample request e-mails • The examples shown below are for illustration purposes only. • Styles applied to the sample e-mail text (such as bold, italic, and underline) are for illustration purposes only. The text you use in your request e-mails does not need to be styled. • The only text in a request e-mail that is case sensitve is the ID. All other text is not case sensitive. ■ ADD request e-mail ■ DELETE request e-mail The ADD request allows you to schedule a new recording or The DELETE request allows you to cancel an existing scheduled reminder. recording or reminder. The required tags for an ADD request e-mail are (in this The required tags for a DELETE request e-mail are (in this order): order): ID [This tag is not required if the “ID Required” field is set to Off ] ID [This tag is not required if the “ID Required” field is set to Off ] COMMAND ADD COMMAND DELETE INPUT INPUT CHANNEL CHANNEL DATE DATE START TIME START TIME DURATION DURATION TYPE TYPE Sample ADD request e-mail to Sample ADD request e-mail to Sample DELETE request e-mail Sample DELETE request e-mail schedule a new recording: schedule a new reminder: to delete an existing recording: to delete an existing reminder: To: [TV’s email address] To: [TV’s email address] To: [TV’s email address] To: [TV’s email address] Subject: [this can be left blank] Subject: [this can be left blank] Subject: [this can be left blank] Subject: [this can be left blank] ID MYID1234* ID MYID1234* ID MYID1234* ID MYID1234* COMMAND ADD cmd add COMMAND DELETE cmd del INPUT ANT-1 input cb INPUT ANT-1 input cb CHANNEL 102-1 ch 4 CHANNEL 102-1 ch 4 DATE 06/10/2005 date 7-4 DATE 06/10/2005 date 7-4 START TIME 7 PM start 8:30pm START TIME 7 PM start 8:30pm DURATION 2H15M dur 1hr DURATION 2H15M dur 1hr TYPE RECORD type remind TYPE REC type rem ■ GET request e-mail ■ HELP request e-mail When you send a GET request e-mail to the TV, you will When you send a HELP request e-mail to the TV, you will receive a reply e-mail that lists all currently scheduled recordings receive a reply e-mail that contains helpful information about and/or reminders. formatting a request e-mail (syntax, definition of the various The only required tag and data for a GET request e-mail is commands, etc.). GET. The only required tag and data for a HELP request e-mail is Sample GET request e-mail: HELP. Sample HELP request e-mail: To: [TV’s email address] Subject: [this can be blank] To: [TV’s email address] Subject: [this can be blank] GET HELP _______________ * The ID is case sensitive. The ID tag is required only if you created an ID in the “ID” field and set the “ID Required” field to On. If you set the “ID Required” field to Off, you do not need to include the ID tag line in your request e-mail. See “Description of fields in the E-mail Scheduling Setup window” on pages 115–116. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 118

Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature G. Using e-mail scheduling (continued) Receiving an e-mail from the TV Modifying an existing recording If the e-mailed request was successful, the reply e-mail from or reminder the TV to your PC will contain one of the following (or similar) messages, depending on the command you sent to the TV: If you want to modify an existing scheduled recording or reminder: • ADD SUCCESS 1. Send a DELETE request e-mail to cancel the existing • DELETE SUCCESS recording or reminder. • GET SUCCESS 2 Send an ADD request e-mail to schedule the modified • HELP SUCCESS recording or reminder. If the e-mailed request was not successful, the reply e-mail from the TV to your PC will contain one of the following For home networktroubleshooting tips, see Chapter 12. (or similar) messages, depending on the command you sent to the TV: • FAILED – SCHEDULE CONFLICT The new recording or reminder you attempted to schedule conflicts with an existing one that was previously scheduled. If you want to schedule the new recording or reminder, you will have to DELETE the existing one first, and then ADD the new one. • FAILED – COULD NOT UNDERSTAND “Line x” The e-mailed request has an error in the line of text referenced in the error message. Correct the text and resend the e-mail. • FAILED – NO DEVICE AVAILABLE Make sure you have a recording device connected to the TV and that all cables are properly connected. • FAILED – MISC ERROR Make sure all devices and cables are properly connected and that the text in the body of your e-mail is correct, and then send the corrected e-mail to the TV. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 119

12 Troubleshooting General troubleshooting Before calling a service technician, please check this entire chapter for a possible cause of the problem and some solutions you can try. Black box on screen • The Closed Caption feature is set to one of the Text modes (T2, T2, T3, or T4). Set the Closed Caption feature to “Off” (page 88). TV stops responding to controls • If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote control or TV front panel and you cannot turn off the TV, press and hold the POWER button on the TV front panel for 5 or more seconds to reset the TV. Other problems • If your TV’s problem is not addressed in this Troubleshooting section or the recommended solution has not worked, use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 57. TV will not turn on • Make sure the power cord is plugged in, and then press POWER. • The remote control batteries may be dead. Replace the batteries or try the front panel buttons. • If you have recently replaced the lamp unit, make sure the lamp unit and lamp unit door are installed properly (See “Lamp unit replacement and care” in Chapter 13). • The lamp unit may need to be replaced (pages 129–131). Also see “LED indications” on page 125. • If the TV is powered off and then quickly on again when the lamp unit is hot, it may take several minutes for the picture to appear on-screen. This is a property of DLP TV lamp technology and is NOT a sign of malfunction. For details, see “IMPORTANT NOTICE ABOUT HOT LAMP RESTART” on page 5. Picture problems General picture problems • Check the antenna/cable connections (Chapter 2). • Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the TV front panel and select a valid video input source (page 72). If no device is connected to any of the inputs on the TV, no picture will display when you select that particular input source. For device connection details, see Chapter 2. • Antenna reception may be poor. Use a highly directional outdoor antenna (if applicable). • The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel. • Adjust the picture qualities (page 84). • If you are using a VCR, make sure the TV/VCR button on the remote control is set correctly (page 32). • If you have two VCRs connected to your TV, make sure you have not connected the same VCR to the TV’s output and input connections at the same time (page 20). • Do not connect both a standard video cable and an S-video cable to the same set of VIDEO inputs (VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, or VIDEO 3) at the same time (Chapter 2). Noisy picture • If you are watching a tuned analog channel (off-air broadcast or Cable TV), set the CableClear®/DNR feature to AUTO to reduce visible interference in the TV picture (page 86). Video Input Selection problems • If the Input Selection window does not appear when you press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the TV front panel, press INPUT or TV/VIDEO a second time, which will change to the next video input source and display the Input Selection window. Cannot view external signals or channel 3 or 4 • If you cannot view signals from external devices connected to VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, or ColorStream,® or from channels 3 or 4, make sure the Input Lock is set to Off (page 99). Poor color or no color • The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel. • Adjust the Tint and/or Color (page 84). • When the ColorStream® signal source is active, the VIDEO OUT terminal outputs blank video. To receive video from the VIDEO OUT signal, a standard video or S-video IN terminal must be used instead of the ColorStream® connections. POP problems • If the POP double-window is open and you start recording, the POP window will close. • The VIDEO OUT terminal will not output the POP picture when the POP window is open (pages 20 and 81). • If you label all of the inputs as “Hide,” the POP feature will be disabled. If you then attempt to access the POP feature, the message “NOT AVAILABLE” will appear on-screen (page 81). Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 120

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting General troubleshooting (continued) Picture problems (continued) Picture brightness changes soon after turning on TV • If you set the lamp mode to Low Power, each time you turn on the TV, the lamp will start out in High Bright mode but will switch to Low Power mode in approximately 1 minute. You will notice a change in screen brightness when this happens. This is normal and is not a sign of malfunction. (See page 80.) Poor composite or S-video picture • If the TV is connected to an external A/V device (e.g., DVD player, video game system, set-top box, etc.) try using a ColorStream or HDMI video connection instead. Picture and sound are out of sync • As with all products that contain a digital display, in rare instances, when viewing certain content (e.g.. television broadcasts, video games, DVDs), you may notice that the sound and picture are slightly out of sync. This phenomenon can be caused by various factors including, without limitation, video processing within the TV, video processing in an attached gaming system, and video processing or different compression rates used by broadcasters in their programming. You may want to try one or more of the following suggestions, which may help to reduce the effect of this phenomenon: - If the TV is connected to an A/V receiver that has a programmable audio delay feature, use this feature to help synchronize the sound to the picture. - If you notice this phenomenon only on certain TV channels, please contact your local broadcast, cable, or satellite provider to inform them of this issue. “Now Booting” message appears on-screen • If you unplug the power cord, when you plug the power cord in again the message “Now Booting...” will display on-screen until the picture appears, or the green LED will blink until the TV enters standby mode. This is normal and is not a sign of malfunction. Sound problems • Check the antenna/cable connections (see Chapter 2). • The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel. • The sound may be muted. Press VOLUME. • If you hear no sound, try setting the MTS feature to stereo mode (page 90). • Make sure the Speakers function in the Audio Setup menu is set correctly (page 93). • If you are not receiving a second audio program from a known SAP source, make sure the MTS feature is set to SAP mode (page 90). • If you hear audio that seems “incorrect” for the program you are watching (such as music or a foreign language), the SAP mode may be on. Set the MTS feature to stereo mode (page 90). • When using an external audio amplifier, if you connect the amplifier to the VAR. AUDIO OUT terminals on the TV, the volume of the TV and amplifier must be set above 0 or you will not hear any sound (page 24). Remote control problems • Make sure the remote control is set to the correct device mode (page 33). • Remove all obstructions between the remote control and the TV. • The remote control batteries may be dead. Replace the batteries (page 33). • Your TV remote control may not operate certain features on your external device. Refer to the owner’s manual for your other device to determine its available features. If your TV remote control does not operate a specific feature on another device, use the remote control that came with the device (page 33). • If the TV still does not act as expected, use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 57. Channel tuning problems • Make sure the remote control is set to the correct device mode (page 33). • The channel may have been erased from the channel memory by the Channel Add/Delete feature. Add the channel to the channel memory (page 48). • The channel may be blocked by the Channels Block feature. Unblock the channel (page 99). • If you are unable to tune digital channels, check the antenna configuration (page 46). If you are still unable to tune digital channels, clear all channels from the channel list (page 48) and reprogram channels into the channel memory (page 47). If you are still unable to tune digital channels, use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 57. Also see “TV stops responding to controls” and “Other problems” on page 123. (Continued on next page) Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 121

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting General troubleshooting (continued) Closed caption problems • If the program or video you selected is not closed-captioned, no captions will display on-screen (page 88). • If text is not available, a black rectangle may appear on-screen. If this happens, turn off the closed caption feature (page 88). • A closed caption signal may not display correctly in the following situations: a) when a videotape has been dubbed; b) when the signal reception is weak; or c) when the signal reception is nonstandard (page 88). Rating blocking (V-Chip) problems • If you forget your PIN code: While the PIN code entering screen is displayed, press RECALL four times within 5 seconds. The PIN code you previously stored will be cleared (page 97). • The V-Chip feature is available for the U.S. V-Chip system only (page 98). Recording problems • If you use the TV’s remote control to start recording, you will not be able to change inputs (page 72), open the POP window (page 81), or open the FAV SCAN multi-window (page 83). If you attempt to do so, the message “Not Available While Recording” will appear on-screen. • If you are recording a digital channel, you can only change analog channels while recording is in progress. If you are recording an analog channel, you can only change digital channels while recording is in progress. This is because the TV tuner that is being recorded (digital or analog) will be locked on the channel that is currently recording. • It is recommended that you use the TV’s remote control to start recording. If you use a device other than the TV’s remote control to start recording and then attempt to access a feature that is normally denied during recording (POP mode, FAV SCAN mode, changing inputs), the recorded audio and/or video may not be what you intended to record. See pages 72 and 76. • If you connected a Symbio™ AVHD recorder, in order to use its full functionality you must first set up the TV Guide On Screen® system (page 26 and Chapter 5). Memory card problems • Make sure you are using a supported or valid memory card format (page 102). • Make sure you have saved your files in the correct file format (page 102). • The memory card may be inserted improperly. Remove the card and reinsert it (page 103). • The memory card may be empty. • The memory card may be damaged. Audio Player problems The Audio Player stutters and/or stops when playing files over the network • The networked PC is not available, was removed from the network, or is in “hibernation.” • The Ethernet cables are not connected properly. Check all cables for proper connection. • Sufficient network band-width is not available. Turn off any other file sharing programs, network-based games, or other network-intensive operations while the Audio Player is playing. “No media found” message is displayed • The memory card is not inserted properly or at all, or does not contain valid MP3 files. • Sharing is not correctly set up on the networked PC. Make sure you connected your home network correctly (page 30) and set up the network address properly (Chapter 11). • The memory card or the shared folder(s) on your networked PC do not contain any files with “.mp3” extension. • The MP3 files exceed the specified limits (see “Media specifications” in Chapter 10). Title or artist name is not displayed • The MP3 file does not contain valid meta-data or does not meet supported specifications (see “Media specifications” in Chapter 10). The Audio Player takes almost a minute to start • Sufficient network band-width is not available. Turn off any other file sharing programs, network-based games, or other network-intensive operations while the Audio Player is playing. • The memory card or shared folder has too many files or sub-folders. If the memory card or shared folder on the networked PC contains a large number of files or nested directories, it may take over a minute for the Audio Player to locate all playable files. The file is displayed but is always skipped • The file is not a valid or supported MP3 file. Some files on the memory card or in the shared folder are not played • Only the first 200 MP3 files found will be played. Folders nested 10 or more levels below the shared folder are not searched. The Audio Player plays (the progress bar and animation change) but audio is not heard • The volume level is not high enough or the TV is muted. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 122

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting General troubleshooting (continued) Picture Viewer problems “No pictures found” message is displayed. • The memory card is not inserted properly or at all, or does not contain valid JPEG files. • Sharing is not correctly set up on the networked PC. Make sure you connected your home network correctly (page 30) and set up the network address properly (Chapter 11). • The memory card or the shared folder(s) on your networked PC do not contain any files with “.jpg” extension. • The JPEG files exceed the specified limits (see “Media specifications” in Chapter 10). Picture Viewer option in menu is disabled. • There are no picture files on the memory card or in the networked PC’s shared folder(s). • The memory card does not contain any valid JPEG files. • The memory card is not inserted properly or at all. • Basic network setup and Home server setup were not successfully performed. Picture is not displayed. Rectangle containing “X” is displayed instead. • The picture file does not meet the specifications for the Picture Viewer (see “Media specifications” in Chapter 10). Picture is not listed at all. • There are no picture files on the memory card or in the networked PC’s shared folder(s). • The number of pictures files found is more than the TV can display. • The picture file does not have a valid “.jpg” extension. • The file is too large or is otherwise not compatible with the TV for display. See “Media specifications” in Chapter 10 for Picture Viewer and JPEG file specifications. Home network troubleshooting Basic network setup problems Cannot connect to network • Check the modem and splitter connections. • Make sure the splitter is connected to the modem or TEL correctly (page 30). • Confirm your modem’s operation with this manual. • Make sure your network address and e-mail account are set up correctly (Chapter 11). No network connection • The Ethernet cables are not connected properly or at all. Connect all cables as shown on page 30. • Make sure the modem’s power cord is plugged in. • Make sure your network address and e-mail account are set up correctly (Chapter 11). Automatic setup fails • The Ethernet cables are not connected properly or at all. Connect all cables as shown on page 30. • The DHCP service is not enabled on the router, or no router is present. Refer to your router’s documentation for instructions on enabling DHCP. If you do not have a router, you must manually set up the network address (page108). • Internet service is not available. Check your cable/DSL modem or contact your ISP for Internet service issues. Manual setup fails • The Ethernet cables are not connected properly or at all. Connect all cables as shown on page 30. • The TV IP address is the same as the networked PC’s. The TV IP address must be different from the PC’s IP address. • The TV IP address is not on the same subnet as the networked PC’s. For example, if the PC has IP 192.168.0.100 with netmask 255.255.255.0, and the TV has IP 192.168.0.200 with netmask 255.255.255.0, then they are both on same subnet. Conversely, if the PC has IP 192.168.1.100 with netmask 255.255.255.0, and the TV has IP 192.168.0.200 with netmask 255.255.255.0, then they are on DIFFERENT sub-nets. Unstable network connection • Unplug the Ethernet cables, and then connect them again. (Continued on next page) Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 123

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting Home network troubleshooting (continued) Home network setup problems The PC (“Home Server”) name is not displayed • The Ethernet cables are not connected properly or at all. Connect all cables as shown on page 30. • The network setup on the PC is incorrect. Make sure both the PC and TV are using the same network type (DHCP/manual) and have compatible network settings. • The networked PC does not have shared folders set up correctly. See “Set up file sharing on your PC” in Chapter 11 for details. • There are no master browsers on the network. To configure your networked PC to be the master browser of its subnet, refer to your operating system user guide or consult an IT professional. • Too many sharing devices are connected. You cannot connect more than 16 sharing devices at one time. The PC (“Home Server”) name is displayed but the shared folder(s) are not displayed. • The networked PC does not have shared folders set up correctly. See “Set up file sharing on your PC” in Chapter 11 for details. • The TV’s user name and password do not match the PC’s. Make sure the user name and password settings in the TV exactly match the settings in the networked PC. User names and passwords are generally case sensitive. E-mail scheduling problems Cannot schedule a recording by e-mail • Select “Test” to confirm the e-mail scheduling setup ( page 114). • Select “Done” after setting up e-mail scheduling ( page 114). • See Chapter 11 in this manual. E-mail test fails after waiting a long time • The Ethernet cables are not connected properly or at all. Connect all cables as shown on page 30. • The DNS (domain name server) is not set up correctly. Check the network settings. • The SMTP and POP3 server settings are incorrect. • The “E-mail Address,” “Account,” or “Password” settings are incorrect. User names and passwords are generally case sensitive. Receiving succeeds but sending fails, or vice-versa • The SMTP and POP3 server settings are incorrect. • The “E-mail Address,” “Account,” or “Password” settings are incorrect. User names and passwords are generally case sensitive. • Your Internet service provider may not support SMTP or POP3 protocols. Check with your ISP for details on supported protocols. The e-mail test passes, but the TV never responds to the e-mails • E-mail scheduling is turned OFF. Turn e-mail scheduling ON (page 113). • The sender’s e-mail address is not the “Authorized E-mail Address.” Make sure the e-mail address you are using to send e-mails to the TV is the same as the “Authorized E-mail Address” in the TV’s e-mail scheduling setup. See “Set up e-mail scheduling” in Chapter 11. Note: Responses from the TV can often be delayed a few mintues, depending on e-mail/Internet service availability when you send the request e-mail. An ADD or DELETE request e-mail returns an “INVALID MAIL VERIFICATION ID” reply • The e-mail authorization ID is not specified or is different from the TV settings. See “Set up e-mail scheduling” in Chapter 11. The e-mail was successfully sent but the recording or reminder did not work. • The time and date in the TV Guide On Screen® system are not set. See “Setting the time and date” on page 55. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 124

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting LED indications The green and red LED lights on the TV front touchpad (to the left of the POWER button) indicate the TV’s status, as described below: • Red ON (solid) and Green OFF = The TV power cord is plugged in. • Green ON (solid) and Red OFF = A recording is in progress while the TV is OFF. • Red ON (solid) and Green ON (solid) = A recording is in progress while the TV is ON. • Green and/or Red blinking (see table below). Note: If the TV loses A/C power (e.g., a power outage occurs or the power cord is unplugged), when power is restored, the green LED will blink while the TV is booting until the remote control is usable. This is normal and is not a sign of malfunction. TV/VIDEO EXIT CHANNEL VOLUME MENU POWER TV front touchpad Red LED Green LED LED Indication Condition Solution 1) Green blinks continuously The lamp unit door is not seated Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Review “Lamp unit at 3-second intervals. properly. replacement and care” in Chapter 13 to ensure that the lamp door Red blinks continuously is installed securely. If the problem persists, contact a Toshiba at 0.5-second intervals. Authorized Service Center. 2) Green blinks continuously The lamp is not working properly. The TV will automatically try to restart itself eight times (see at 0.5-second intervals; item #3). Red is ON (solid). Note: If the TV is powered off and then quickly on again when the lamp unit is hot, it may take several minutes for the picture to appear on-screen. This is a property of DLP TV lamp technology and is NOT a sign of malfunction. For details, see “Setting the Quick Restart® feature” and “IMPORTANT NOTICE ABOUT HOT LAMP RESTART” on page 56. 3) Green and Red blink The lamp is not working properly Turn the TV OFF and then ON again. If the problem persists, replace continuously at after the eighth automatic restart the lamp unit (see Chapter 13). If the problem still persists, contact a 1-second intervals. (see item #2). Toshiba Authorized Service Center. 4) Green is OFF; An abnormal temperature Turn OFF the TV. Check to make sure all slots and openings in the Red blinks at 0.2-second increase has occurred. TV cabinet are not covered, blocked, or dusty. Turn ON the TV intervals 4 times (repeats). again. If the problem persists, contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center. 5) Green is OFF; Abnormal operation Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Plug the power cord Red blinks continuously (including cooling fan stop). in again and turn ON the TV. If the problem persists, contact a at 0.5-second intervals. Toshiba Authorized Service Center. 6) Green is OFF; Abnormal operation of BUS line. Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Plug the power cord Red blinks continuously in again and turn ON the TV. If the problem persists, contact a at 1-second intervals. Toshiba Authorized Service Center. 7) Green is OFF; The color wheel has stopped. Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Plug the power cord Red blinks at 0.2-second in again and turn ON the TV. If the problem persists, contact a intervals 3 times (repeats). Toshiba Authorized Service Center. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 125

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting TV Guide On Screen® FAQ The following are frequently asked questions about the TV Guide On Screen® system. The answers represent the most likely solutions to the problem. After you set up the TV Guide On Screen® system (Chapter 5), the 7. Q: I had a power outage. Do I need to go through initial program guide opens automatically by default when you turn on setup of the TV Guide On Screen® system again? the TV. You can turn off the automatic program guide (see page 45) A: No. The information you entered is stored in the TV Guide and instead press the TV GUIDE button on the remote control to On Screen® system memory. manually open the TV Guide On Screen® program guide. Note: For Cable box users, the TV must be OFF and the Cable SETUP box must be left ON for the TV Guide On Screen® system to receive channel line-up information. 1. Q: What if I move and my ZIP code or postal code changes? 8. Q: How do I connect the G-LINK® (IR blaster) cable to A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight the G-LINK® input on the TV? Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER. A: See Chapter 2: Connecting your TV in this manual. Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new information You also can refer to the TV Guide On Screen® prompts (see Chapter 5 for details). It can take up to 24 hours to during VCR or Cable box setup. receive new data. 2. Q: What if I change my cable hook-up to antenna or vice 9. Q: When will I be able to view my TV program listings and versa? use other TV Guide On Screen® system features? A: You will be able to use initial program listings within 24 A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER. hours of initial setup. It may take up to one week to receive Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input the full eight days of program listings. information and rescan channels for the new input (see 10. Q: What should I do if I cannot complete initial setup? Chapter 5 for details). It can take up to 24 hours to receive new data. A: If you are unable to complete initial setup using the owner’s manual and the on-screen prompts, please call Toshiba’s 3. Q: What if I change cable boxes? National Service Division at 1-800-631-3811. A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER. 11. Q: If I make a mistake during setup, how do I go back to Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input the previous step? information and rescan channels for the new input (see A: Complete the remaining setup steps. When “Confirming Chapter 5 for details). It can take up to 24 hours to receive Your Settings” appears, select “No, repeat setup process.” new data. Follow the on-screen prompts and input the correct information. 4. Q: I used to have a cable box, but now I get direct cable. What do I do? 12. Q: What if the channel number is not visible on my cable A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight box? Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER. A: Your cable box may be defaulting to a clock or time display Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input once the channel changes. Watch the box carefully when information and rescan channels for the new input (see testing the cable box brand code to see if the channel Chapter 5 for details). It can take up to 24 hours to receive changes to 09. new data. 13. Q: Why won’t my VCR turn on? 5. Q: If I add a recorder or change my cable service, how do I change my Setup information? A: There are several possibilities: A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight a) An incorrect or “no VCR” code was entered during the Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER. TV Guide On Screen® initial setup. Press the TV GUIDE Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new information button on the remote control, and then press • to (see Chapter 5 for details). It can take up to 24 hours to highlight SETUP. Press z to highlight “Change system receive new data. settings,” and then press ENTER. Follow the on-screen prompts to select the correct VCR information. 6. Q: Why does it take up to 24 hours for the TV Guide b) Make sure the G-LINK® (IR blaster) cable is connected On Screen® system to be ready for use? correctly (see page 28). A: The initial setup process consists of finding the stations in c) The VCR record timer is on. Turn off the timer. your area that carry the TV Guide On Screen® system data and tuning to those stations to receive the setup and d) The wired remote VCR is incompatible. listings data. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 126

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting TV Guide On Screen® FAQ (continued) CHANNEL LINEUPS & LISTINGS 20. Q: After some show titles, I have noticed from 1 to 4 stars 14. Q: Why aren’t all my channels initially displayed? (****). What does that mean? A: After initial setup, approximately 120 channels are A: These stars are a broadcast-industry ratings system used to automatically displayed. The user may use the “Change inform you of a show’s quality. The more stars, the better channel display” feature to turn additional channels ON the rating. or OFF. Note: Even though you have the option of enabling many 21. Q: What do the colors for shows in the Listings and Search more channels, the system may not have the memory capacity screens indicate? to hold detailed program descriptions for all of them. A: Green = Sports; Dark Blue = Children’s; Purple = Movies; Teal = Other Show. 15. Q: When I opened the TV Guide On Screen® system, I was asked to choose from more than one channel lineup. What should I do? 22. Q: How do I add, delete, or change the assigned number of channels on the TV Guide On Screen® system? A: Select the lineup that most closely matches the one for your area. If after you choose the lineup, you want to make A: See “Change channel display” on page 70. changes to it, highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to select Change Channel Display. Follow the on-screen 23. Q: Why are some of my channels listed on the wrong instructions. number? A: There are several possibilities (see page 70 for details): 16. Q: Why do all my channels display “No Listing?” a) An incorrect channel lineup was selected. Access “Change A: The TV Guide On Screen® system has not yet received its system settings” and choose “Yes, but my channel lineup is data download. The phrase “No Listing” will be replaced incorrect,” and then reselect the correct lineup. with program information during the next download cycle, which will occur within the next 24-hour period. b) Channel lineup changes have not yet been processed. Use the “Change channel display” feature to make adjustments. 17. Q: Why do some of my channels display “No Listing?” c) An incorrect ZIP/postal code (or other incorrect data) was A: There are several possibilities: entered during initial setup. Redo the initial setup. a) The channels in question were recently turned ON (in the Change Channel Display feature; see page 70) but the 24. Q: Why doesn’t the highlighted program match up with TV Guide On Screen® system has not received its next the video window on my TV screen? data download. A: There are several possibilities (see page 70 for details): b) After completing the initial setup, the first data download a) The station in question made a late change to its scheduled of the day was interrupted by a VCR recording. program listing and the TV Guide On Screen® system has c) The TV power cord was left unplugged for an extended not yet been updated. period of time and the TV Guide On Screen® system was b) The TV is receiving broadcasts through a modified or unable to receive program listings during the scheduled boosted antenna system or a satellite dish (not supported download cycle. by the TV Guide On Screen® system). d) Poor reception caused some of the data to be missed. c) An incorrect ZIP/postal code (or other incorrect data) was e) The cable box was turned OFF. The TV power cord must entered during initial setup. Redo the initial setup. be plugged in and the cable box must be ON. d) An incorrect channel lineup was selected. Access “Change g) A/V Cable: The VCR was turned OFF. If the connection system settings” and choose “Yes, but my channel lineup includes stereo cables with cable box to VCR and stereo is incorrect,” and then reselect the correct lineup (see page connection from VCR to television, the VCR must be ON. 70 for details). 18. Q: A show entry in the TV Guide On Screen® system reads e) The video window may be locked. Press SPLIT to unlock. “No Listing.” What does that mean? A: Show information for that entry was not available during 25. Q: Can I move my favorite stations to the top of the the last TV Guide On Screen® system data download. TV Guide On Screen® display screen? Show information is updated on a daily basis. A: Yes. Use the “Change channel display” feature to make adjustments (see page 70). Highlight the station call letters 19. Q: I have seen the word “download” in reference to the TV to be moved, then use the up/down arrows and/or Number Guide On Screen system. What does that mean? buttons to reassign the position of the station. A: “Download” refers to the times throughout the day when the TV Guide On Screen® system in your TV is receiving (Continued on next page) channel and listings information from your Cable or over- the-air antenna transmission. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 127

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting TV Guide On Screen® FAQ (continued) OPERATIONS 32. Q: Is Help available in the TV Guide On Screen® system? If so, how do I find it? 26. Q: How can I look for a specific show in the TV Guide On Screen® system? A: Yes. Highlight any of the five main Services (Listings, Schedule, Recordings, Setup, Search) and press the INFO A: SEARCH lets you find shows by keyword, alphabetically, key on the remote control. An expanded Info Box displays or by category (HDTV, Movies, Sports, Children, additional help information. Press INFO again to close Educational, News, Variety, Series). the box. 27. Q: My cable box will not change channels with the Help is also available in a panel menu. Press INFO to TV Guide On Screen® system. What’s wrong? display an expanded Info Box. Press INFO again to close the box. A: There are several possibilities: a) The incorrect cable box code was entered during TV Guide RECORD/REMIND On Screen® initial setup. Redo initial setup. 33. Q: Can I tune to a different channel while recording a b) The G-LINK® (IR blaster) cable may not be connected program? properly (see page 28). A: No. c) The cable box has no remote capability and is incompatible. 34. Q: How many programs can be scheduled for RECORD in the GUIDE? 28. Q: How do I resize or close the Info window? A: There is no limit to the number of shows that can be A: Press the INFO button on the remote control to resize the programmed into the schedule memory. Info window. Press the INFO button again to close the 35. Q: If a program is scheduled to RECORD on a Regular Info window. basis, does it count as five? 29. Q: Is there a way to go directly to the next day’s listings A: No, whether a program is scheduled ONCE, without scrolling through each time slot? REGULARLY, or WEEKLY, it only counts as one show in the RECORD stack memory. A: Yes. In LISTINGS, highlight the station for which you want to look ahead and use the Channel Number buttons 36. Q: If I have a power failure, will I need to reset the on the remote control to enter “24.” In the resulting menu, recorded shows I have already programmed? press z two times to scroll down to select the HOURS A: The start times and channel numbers of shows that have AHEAD option, and then press ENTER. You also can use been programmed will be retained in the memory of the the SKIP button on the remote control. TV Guide On Screen® system. Titles will appear once listings are restored. 30. Q: Why can’t I record a show? All I get is snow or a blue screen. 37. Q: Can I set a Record or Remind event without A: There are several possibilities (without a cable box): highlighting a show title in the TV Guide On Screen® system? a) The recording unit was not connected or set up correctly. A: Yes. TV Guide On Screen® has a Manual Record and b) The incorrect channel lineup was selected. Press GUIDE Remind feature. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar, and then • to highlight SETUP. Press z to highlight and press MENU. Choose the event type, press ENTER, “Change system settings,” and then press ENTER. Follow and then enter the date, start and stop time, channel the on-screen prompts to select the correct channel lineup. number, and so forth. 31. Q: Why won’t my VCR change channels and why does it 38. Q: What do the frequencies for Record and Remind mean? change to the wrong channel? A: Once—records/reminds the show one time. A: There are two possibilities (with a cable box): a) The VCR is not set on the correct output channel. Set the Daily (manual only)—records the time, channel, input, VCR to 03, 04, or whichever output channel is set by your recorder combination Monday through Friday. cable system. Regularly— records/reminds the show every time the show b) The VCR and/or cable box are hooked up incorrectly. airs on the same channel and starts at the same time. Refer to your VCR owner’s manual or contact your Cable Weekly— records/reminds the show each time the show TV company for proper wiring procedures. airs on the same day of the week, on the same channel and starts at the same time. Off (not cancel)—keeps the show in the Schedule list but will not record/remind the show until the frequency is changed. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 128

13 Appendix Lamp unit replacement and care Replacing the lamp unit When to replace the lamp unit (User-replaceable component) You should replace the lamp unit: • if the picture darkens and/or colors fade; WARNING: RISK OF • if the screen (lamp) does not light (LED indication #3, ELECTRIC SHOCK! page 125); or TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, NEVER • if you hear a loud noise and the picture goes black, which REMOVE TV COVERS, EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED may indicate a lamp rupture (LED indication #3, HEREIN. REFER ALL SERVICING NOT SPECIFIED IN page 125). THIS MANUAL TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Failure to follow this WARNING may result in death To obtain a replacement lamp unit: or serious injury. In the U.S. The light source for this TV is a mercury lamp with internal In warranty: Visit www.tacp.toshiba.com/service atmospheric pressure that increases during use. The lamp has a or call toll-free 1-800-631-3811. limited service life that varies depending on product use and user settings. Out of warranty: Visit www.ceaccessories.toshiba.com or consult your consumer electronics dealer. As is generally the case with all projection TVs that use projection lamps as a light source, the brightness of the lamp in this TV may vary somewhat over the expected service life and Use only the replacement lamp unit model listed below. will generally decrease over time. The average useful service life Using any other lamp may cause damage to the TV of the lamp is approximately 8,000 hours in Low Power mode and/or lamp. SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED and approximately 6,000 hours in High Bright mode. See UNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY. “Selecting the Lamp mode” on page 80 for information on switching the lamp mode. Because these are averages, some CAUTION: Always replace with same lamps will require earlier replacement. type lamp unit: Model No. D95-LMP Note : The lamp is warranted only for the periods and to the (Stock no. 23311153) extent set forth in the Limited Warranty applicable to this set, which is a substantially shorter period of time than the average useful service period. See “Limited United States Warranty” on page 133. If you use the lamp beyond its service life: • you may notice a reduction in the colors and/or brightness of the picture; and • the strength of the quartz glass in the lamp will be reduced and the lamp may rupture (often making a loud noise when this happens). If the lamp ruptures, the TV will not operate until the lamp unit is replaced. CAUTION: Always handle the lamp unit with care. The lamp unit in this TV was designed for safe replacement by consumers; however, if the lamp unit is subjected to intentional abuse (such as excessive mechanical abuse or handling by children or pets), the unit may break, exposing sharp edges or pinch points. Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 129

Chapter 13: Appendix Lamp unit replacement and care (continued) How to replace the lamp unit 4. Using a manual Phillips screwdriver, loosen the two screws on WARNING: RISK OF the lamp unit. ELECTRIC SHOCK! TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, NEVER REMOVE TV COVERS, EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED HEREIN. REFER ALL SERVICING NOT SPECIFIED IN THIS MANUAL TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Failure to follow this WARNING may result in death or serious injury. Required tools: • Manual Phillips screwdriver • Soft, lint-free gloves Lamp unit screws Optional tool: 5/32" or 4mm Allen wrench 1. Turn off the TV and unplug the power cord. WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK! WARNING: Eye damage may result from The lamp unit door is provided with an directly viewing the light produced by this interlock to reduce the risk of electric shock and excessive lamp. Always turn off the TV and unplug the ultraviolet radiation. Never defeat its purpose or attempt power cord before opening the lamp unit door. to service without removing the lamp unit door completely. Failure to follow this WARNING may result in death or serious injury. 2. STOP! Allow the lamp to cool for at least one (1) hour before replacing it. 5. Grasp the lamp unit handle and gently pull the lamp unit CAUTION: HOT SURFACE! straight out of the TV. Set the old lamp unit aside (see The temperature of the lamp “Disposing of the used lamp unit” on page 124). immediately after use exceeds 392°F (200°C). Touching the lamp before it has cooled will result in severe burns. ALLOW THE LAMP TO COOL FOR AT LEAST ONE (1) HOUR BEFORE REPLACING IT. 3. On the lamp unit door on the side of the TV, loosen the thumb screw by hand or by using a 5/32” or 4mm Allen wrench, and then remove the lamp unit door. TV back Note: Wear soft, lint-free gloves when replacing the lamp unit. Thumb screw (Continued on next page) Lamp unit door detail Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 130

Chapter 13: Appendix Lamp unit replacement and care (continued) How to replace the lamp unit (continued) 6. Carefully insert the new lamp unit straight into the TV until 8. Reattach the lamp unit door, making sure to insert the hooks it is fully seated. on the left side of the lamp unit door inside the opening in the TV cabinet. Insert the hooks inside the TV cabinet opening. Lamp unit door 9. Replace the thumb screw and hand-tighten. Note : • Never subject the lamp unit to excessive shock. • Never touch the lamp unit glass or otherwise get it dirty. Thumb screw Doing so may affect the image quality and reduce the service life of (hand-tighten only) the lamp. See “Cleaning the lamp unit glass” below. Lamp unit door NOTE : Make sure CLEANING THE LAMP UNIT GLASS the lamp unit door is If you accidentally touch the lamp unit glass or otherwise installed securely; otherwise, get it dirty, wipe it with a lint-free lens cleaning cloth (such the TV may not turn on. as a cloth for cleaning camera lenses or eyeglasses). 10. Plug in the power cord and turn on the TV. After the initial CAUTION: NEVER clean a hot lamp with warmup period (which may take several seconds for full any type of flammable liquid or aerosol picture brightness), the TV should operate normally. If any of cleaning agent. Many ordinary cleaning agents the following conditions exist, turn off the TV, unplug the (such as glass cleaners) contain chemicals that may be power cord, and repeat steps 1–9 to ensure that the lamp unit flammable at certain temperatures. If the lamp unit is not allowed and lamp unit door are installed correctly: to cool for at least one (1) hour, such chemicals may ignite. • No picture • Dark picture • TV will not turn on If, after repeating steps 1–9, the problem still exists, call TACP 7. Using a manual Phillips screwdriver, tighten the two lamp Consumer Solutions at 1-800-631-3811. unit screws. Note: Hand-tighten only. Do not use an electric screwdriver. Disposing of the used lamp unit • Place the used lamp unit in the empty box from the new unit. • Keep the lamp unit out of reach of children and pets. CAUTION: Always handle the lamp unit with care. The lamp unit in this TV was designed for safe replacement by consumers; however, if the lamp unit is subjected to intentional or accidental abuse (such as excessive mechanical abuse or handling by children or pets), the unit may break, exposing sharp edges or pinch points. • Dispose of the used lamp unit by the approved method for Lamp unit screws (use manual Phillips screwdriver only) your area. NOTE : The lamp unit contains mercury. Disposal of mercury may NOTE : Make sure the lamp unit and screws be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or are installed securely; otherwise, the TV may not recycling information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries turn on and the lamp life may be shortened. Alliance (www.eiae.org). Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 131

Chapter 13: Appendix Specifications NOTE: • This model complies with the specifications listed below. • Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice. • This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future. Television System Video/Audio Terminals (continued) NTSC standard HDMI™ INPUT: ATSC standard (8VSB) HDMI compliant (type A connector) Digital Cable (64 QAM, 256 QAM; in-the-clear, unencrypted*) HDCP compliant *Encrypted channels can be viewed on this TV E-EDID** compliant using a CableCARD.™ See page 14 for details. Suggested formats: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p HDMI Audio: 2-channel PCM; 32/44.1/48 kHz sampling Channel Coverage frequency; 16/20/24 bits per sample VHF: 2 through 13 UHF: 14 through 69 VIDEO/AUDIO OUTPUT (also for recording): Cable TV: Mid band (A-8 through A-1, A through I) VIDEO: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync. Super band (J through W) AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent, Hyper band (AA through ZZ, AAA, BBB) 2.2 k ohm or less) Ultra band (65 through 94, 100 through 135) VARIABLE AUDIO OUTPUT: 0–300 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent, Power Source 2.2 k ohm or less) 120 V AC, 60 Hz G-LINK®: 3 V(p-p), 3.5 mm mono socket (IR blaster cables supplied) Power Consumption 240 W (average) IEEE1394 INPUT/OUTPUT: 38 W in standby mode (using a CableCARD™) IEEE1394 compliant 4-pin 34 W in standby mode (without a CableCARD™) DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT: Optical type PC VIDEO IN: Audio Power Mini D-sub 15-pin Analog RGB 15 W + 15 W PC AUDIO IN: 150 mV(rms) 22 k ohm or greater Speaker Type TheaterNet™: Main: Two 4 inch (10 cm) round OUTPUT: 3 V (p-p), 10 k ohm Tweeter: Two 1-5/8 inch (4 cm) round INPUT: 3 V (p-p) to 5 V (p-p), pulse code modulated (Toshiba TV code) over 38 kHz carrier Video/Audio Terminals S-VIDEO INPUT: RJ-45 port: Standard Ethernet (RJ-45) Y: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync. C: 0.286 V(p-p) (burst signal), 75 ohm Dimensions 52HMX95: Width: 58-3/8 inches (1,483 mm) VIDEO/AUDIO INPUT: Height: 35-1/16 inches (891 mm) VIDEO: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync. Depth: 15-5/16 inches (389 mm) AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent, 62HMX95: Width: 67-1/16 inches (1,703 mm) 22 k ohm or greater) Height: 40-15/16 inches (1,040 mm) ColorStream® (component video) HD INPUT: Depth: 18-1/4 inches (464 mm) VIDEO: Y: 1V(p-p), 75 ohm Weight PR: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 ohm 52HMX95: 87 lbs (39.5 kg) PB : 0.7 V(p-p), 75 ohm 62HMX95: 103 lbs (46.7 kg) Suggested formats: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p Supplied Accessories AUDIO: 150 mV(rms), 22 k ohm or greater • Two dual-wand IR blaster cables • Remote control with two size “AA” alkaline batteries • Owner’s manual (this book) Optional Stands: _________ 52HMX95: ST5275 ** E-EDID = Enhanced-Extended Display Identification 62HMX95: ST6275 Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 132

Chapter 13: Appendix Limited United States Warranty for DLP™ Television Models Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. (“TACP”) makes the following Your Responsibility limited warranties to original consumers in the United States. THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONDITIONS: CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS DLP™ (1) You must retain your original bill of sale or provide other proof of TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER purchase. PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE. (2) All warranty servicing of this DLP™ Television must be performed by an Authorized TACP Service Station. DLP™ TELEVISIONS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED ANYWHERE (3) The warranties from TACP are effective only if this DLP™ Television is OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA purchased and operated in the Continental U.S.A. or Puerto Rico. AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES. (4) Labor service charges for set installation, setup, adjustment of customer controls, and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered DLP™ TELEVISIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., by this warranty. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, AND USED systems, misaligned satellite dishes, cable television distribution, VCRs, IN THE U.S.A., ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES. DVD players/recorders, personal computer level IEEE1394 devices, and any other connected signal source device are your responsibility.. (5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor above, and do not extend to any DLP™ Television or parts that have TACP warrants this DLP™ Television and its parts against defects in materials been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the DLP™ Television or or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of original retail parts caused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as lightning purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP’S OPTION, or fluctuations in electric power), improper installation, improper REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by TACP; use REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR or malfunction through simultaneous use of this DLP™ Television and LABOR. During this period, TACP Authorized Service Station personnel will connected equipment; or to units that have been modified or had the come to your home when warranty service is required. Depending on the serial number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible. type of repair required, the service will either be performed in your home or How to Obtain Warranty Service the DLP™ Television will be taken to a TACP Authorized Service Station for If, after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and reviewing repair and returned to your home at no cost to you. the section titled “Troubleshooting,” you find that service is needed: Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Lamp Unit (1) Locate the nearest TACP Authorized Service Station by visiting the TACP website at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service or calling the TACP warrants the original lamp unit contained in this DLP™ Television TACP Consumer Solution Center toll free at 1-800-631-3811. against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after (2) Present your original bill of sale or other proof of purchase to the TACP the date of original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, Authorized Service Station. AT TACP’S OPTION, EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE LAMP UNIT WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED LAMP UNIT WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU. For additional information, visit TACP’s web site: LABOR CHARGES FOR LAMP UNIT REPLACEMENT ARE YOUR www.tacp.toshiba.com. RESPONSIBILITY AND ARE NOT COVERED UNDER THIS ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF WARRANTY. The lamp unit is a user-replaceable component. THE U.S.A., INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, Rental Units ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED The warranty for DLP™ Television rental units begins on the date of the first WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY rental or thirty (30) days after the date of shipment to the rental firm, WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS whichever comes first. HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS, AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO THE Limited Warranty for Commercial Units REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL TACP warrants DLP™ Televisions, including the lamp units contained therein, TACP BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES that are sold and used for commercial purposes as follows: all parts are (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS warranted against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of ninety INTERRUPTION, OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED (90) days after the date of original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DLP™ TACP WILL, AT TACP’S OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE TELEVISION). PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change, YOU. modify, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever. The time within which an action must be commenced to enforce any Owner’s Manual and Product Registration obligation of TACP arising under the warranty or under any statute or law of Read this owner’s manual thoroughly before operating this DLP™ Television. the United States or any state thereof is hereby limited to ninety (90) days from the date you discover, or should have discovered, the defect. This Complete and mail the enclosed product registration card or register your limitation does not apply to implied warranties arising under the law of any DLP™ Television online at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service as soon as state of the U.S.A. possible. By registering your DLP™ Television you will enable TACP to bring THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU you new products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE contact you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required under the TO STATE IN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW Consumer Product Safety Act. Failure to register your product does not LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, diminish your warranty rights. WHEN AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. THEREFORE, THE ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES. 05 Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 133

Chapter 13: Appendix A copy of the GPL source code in this product may be obtained by THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND contacting Toshiba Consumer Solutions at (800) 631-3811. There will ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT be a charge to cover the costs of providing the source code. LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT A copy of the LGPL source code in this product may be obtained by SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR contacting Toshiba Consumer Solutions at (800) 631-3811. There will ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR be a charge to cover the costs of providing the source code. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, USB Protocol Copyright © 2005 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, reserved. DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF are met: ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]). 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]). All Rights and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young 3. Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its ([email protected]). The implementation was written so as to conform with contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use from this software without specified prior written permission. so long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN of conditions, and the following disclaimer. ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for and/or other materials provided with the distribution. use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org). 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes ([email protected]). cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]).” The OpenSSL 0.9.7d Copyright © 1998-2000 the OpenSSL Project. All Rights word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the routines from the library being reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without used are not cryptographic related. modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or derivative thereof) from the 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, ([email protected]).” this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY and/or other materials provided with the distribution. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, (http://openssl.org). INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL 4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “Open SSL Project” must not be DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF used to endorse or promote products derived from this software SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY [email protected] THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR 5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY may “Open SSL” appear in their names without prior written permission WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE of the OpenSSL Project. POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The license and distribution terms for 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed, acknowledgement: “This product includes software developed by the i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org).” license (including the GNU Public License). Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 134

Index A DSL modem 30 MN S Account 108 DVI connection 21 Memory cards 102–106 Safety, care, installation, and Antenna cables 13 Dynamic Contrast 87 Memory Stick™ memory cards service 2–5 Antenna input configuration 101, 102 SAP sound 90 46 EFG Menu system 40, 41 Satellite receiver connection 17 Audio player 102 E-mail account setup 108 MMC memory cards 101, 102 Sub-bass (SBS) 91 Audio quality adjustments 91 E-mail recording 113 MP3 101, 102, 104, 105 Scrolling the TheaterWide® Audio system connection 24 E-mail 113 MPEG-2 digital video signals picture 79 EIA-775 25 25 SD (Secure Digital™) memory Auto aspect 79 FAV SCAN button 49, 83 MTS feature 90 cards 101, 102 Auto power off 96 Favorite channels 49, 83 MUTE button 90 Service 4 AVHD 26, 55 Features, TV 8 Network addres 106 Setup, TV 41, 46 B Setup, TV Guide On Screen® Focus 92 OPQ Back of the TV 11 system 42 Front of the TV 10 On/Off timer 94 Banner, Channel Browser™ 74 Sleep timer 94 Front panel lock 100 Optical audio cable 13 Blocking channels 99 Speakers ON/OFF 93 Front panel touchpad 10, 41 Optical audio output format 93 C Specifications 125 GameTimer™ 100 Panel lock 100 Cable box connection 16, 18 SRS 3D 92 G-LINK® connection 28 Password 108 CableCARD™ 14 SRS TruSurround 92 PC connection 29 HIJ SRS WOW™ 92 CableCARD™ connection 14 PC setting 95 HDMI audio mode 55 StableSound® 91 CableClear® DNR 86 Picture adjustments: HDMI™ connection 21 Stereo sound 90 Cables 13 CableClear®/DNR (digital Home File server setup 112 noise reduction) 86 S-video cables 13 Cable modem 30 Home network connection 30 Color Management 85 SurfLock™ 76 Camcorder connection 15 ID 113 Color temperature 86 Symbio™ AVHD recorder 26, 55 CH yz buttons 47, 72 IEEE1394 25 Dynamic Contrast 87 System status 57 Channel Browser™ 74 INPUT button 72 MPEG noise reduction 87 CH RTN button 76 T Input lock 99 Picture mode 84 Channel Number buttons 47, Telephone cable 30 49, 72 Installation, care, and service 3, Picture quality 84 4 TheaterNet™ DEVICE and Channel programming: Picture-out-picture (POP): CONTROL buttons 51 Installation, setup 9 FAV SCAN button 83 Automatic programming 47 TheaterNet™ control 25 Integrated digital tuning 8 SPLIT button 81 Manually adding and TheaterNet IR device codes deleting 48 IR blaster 22 Picture scroll 79 52-54 Cinema mode 80 ISP (Internet Service Provider) Picture size selection 77 TheaterWide® picture size 78 105 Closed captions 88 Picture viewer 102 TheaterNet™ setup 50 JPEG 101–104 Color temperature 86 POWER button 10, 31, 36 THINC™ system 12, 107 ColorStream® 19 L Quick Restart™ 56 Time and date setting 55 Connecting devices 15–30 Labeling video inputs 73 Troubleshooting 120-128 R CompactFlash® memory cards Lamp mode 80 TruBass 92 101, 102 RECALL button 96 Lamp unit replacement 129–131 Remote control: TruSurround 92 Component video cables 13 Language selection 46 Battery installation 33 TV Guide On Screen® 9, 42, 58 Component video Last mode memory feature 96 Device code table 38, 39 TV/VIDEO button 72, 73 (ColorStream®) 19 LED indications 10, 125 Effective range 32 D V Locking video inputs 99 Functional key chart 34, 35 Defaults, restore TV factory 57 V-Chip blocking (Locks menu) LOCKS menu 97 Learning about the buttons 97–100 Digital Audio Out 24 Channels, blocking 99 31 VCR connection 15–20 Digital signal meter 57 Enable rating blocking 98 Operational feature reset 37 Video cables 13 DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) Front Panel lock 100 Programming 36 86 Video input labels 73 GameTimer™ 100 Searching and sampling the Dolby Digital 24 code 36 Video input lock 99 New PIN code 97 VOLUME button 10, 37, 90 Dolby Virtual with SRS Volume lock feature 37 TruSurround 92 Unlocking programs temporarily 99 Restore TV factory defaults 57 W, X Double-window POP feature 81 RJ-45 (LAN) cable 30 Video inputs, locking 99 Warranty 133 DVD player connection 18, 19 RJ-45 (THINC™) connection 30 WOW™, SRS® 92 D-VHS 25, 55 Router 30 xD-Picture Card™ 101, 102 Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 135

TOSHIBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCTS, L.L.C. HEAD OFFICE: 82 TOTOWA ROAD, WAYNE, NJ 07470, U.S.A. NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION:1420-B TOSHIBA DRIVE, LEBANON, TN 37087, U.S.A. MANUFACTURED BY TOSHIBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCTS, L.L.C. CableClear, Cinema Series, ColorStream, StableSound, and TheaterWide are registered trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. Channel Browser, GameTimer, SurfLock, Symbio, Quick Restart, TheaterNet, and THINC are trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. Digital Light Processing, DLP and the DLP medallion are trademarks of Texas Instruments. PRINTED IN USA (05-11)A Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.